Quarterlytics / Healthcare / Drug Manufacturers - General / Benchmark Holdings plc

Benchmark Holdings plc

bmk · LSE Healthcare
Claim this profile
Ticker bmk
Exchange LSE
Sector Healthcare
Industry Drug Manufacturers - General
Employees 501-1000
← All annual reports
FY2017 Annual Report · Benchmark Holdings plc
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
Benchmark Holdings plc  
Annual Report 2017

TECHNOLOGY 
DRIVEN 
GROWTH

OUR  
VISION

To be the leading global 
player in aquaculture 
health, genetics and 
advanced nutrition

 • We address some of the main challenges 

facing the aquaculture industry

 • We focus on improving yield, quality and 

profitability for our customers 

 • We bring together technology and biology 
to deliver innovative products that support 
producers throughout the growth cycle

CONTENTS

01.    
Strategic Report 

03.    
Financial Statements 

08 

10 

12 

14 

18 

22 

28 

54 

56 

64 

72 

78 

80 

Benchmark at a Glance

110 

Independent Auditor’s Report

Our Sites

2017 Milestones

 Market Overview

Chairman's Statement

Strategic Review

Business Review

30  Genetics

36  Advanced Nutrition

42  Animal Health

48   Knowledge Services

Business Model

 Environmental, Social  
& Governance (ESG)

Our People

Financial Review

Risk Management

 Principal Risks  
and Uncertainties

114 

 Consolidated Income Statement

115 

 Consolidated Statement  
of Comprehensive Income

116  Consolidated Balance Sheet

117  Company Balance Sheet

118 

119 

120 

121 

122 

 Consolidated Statement  
of Changes in Equity

 Company Statement  
of Changes in Equity

 Consolidated Statement  
of Cash Flows

 Company Statement  
of Cash Flows

 Notes Forming Part  
of the Financial Statements

04.    
Additional Information 

174  Glossary

175  Advisers

02.    
Governance 

84 

86 

90 

93 

97 

Introduction to the Board

 Leadership

Effectiveness

Accountability

Remuneration

102  Shareholders

102  Directors’ Report

106 

 Directors’ Responsibility 
Statement

Registered office:

Benchmark Holdings plc 
Benchmark House 
8 Smithy Wood Drive 
Sheffield S35 1QN

Registered number: 04115910

 
 
 
 
2017  
HIGHLIGHTS

Benchmark has delivered growth and 
achieved significant milestones, whilst 
continuing its focused investment in 
the development of its pipeline and 
infrastructure despite the challenges  
faced in the year.

Malcolm Pye 
Chief Executive Officer

FINANCIAL HIGHLIGHTS

Significant organic growth despite the challenges in the year, as we have continued  
our focused investment in the development of the Group’s pipeline and infrastructure.

 • Revenue increased by 28%  

to £140.2m (2016: £109.4m) 
 • Like for like1 sales, up by 13%
 • Expensed R&D increased by 

£1.4m to £13.1m but reduced 
as a percentage of sales to 9% 
(2016: 11%) reflecting increased 
capitalised R&D and control of 
spend in line with revenue growth

 • £21.5m investment in  

state-of-the-art additional  
production capacity in  
genetics and animal health
 • Adjusted EBITDA2 increased by  
9% to £10.0m (2016: £9.2m) 
 • Loss reduced by 61% to (£7.1m) 

(2016: (£18.3m))

 • Net debt3 increased as  

expected to £23.9m including 
£6.0m of ringfenced non-recourse 
debt used to part fund Genetics 
capital expenditure

OPERATIONAL HIGHLIGHTS

Further developed our leadership in aquaculture with large scale production 
facilities now in seven countries combined with our established distribution 
network to serve 1,435 customers in 70 countries.

Advanced Nutrition 
 • Advanced Nutrition grew like for like1 
revenues by 21%. Continued signs 
of recovery in key shrimp markets 
resulting in strong growth in sales 
of compound hatchery, diets and 
specialised health products, with 
Artemia sales similar to last year

 • New 10 year sales and  

marketing agreement with  
the Great Salt Lake Cooperative  
— securing continued access to  
high quality live feed (artemia)
 • Launch of two new products 
 • Sanolife GUT — targeted  

at marine fish in Greece with 
potential to expand to other 
geographies and to shrimp

 • Sanolife PRO-2 —  

improved formulation of  
an established product
 • Development of 100% replacement 
feed for artemia progressing to plan. 
This will allow Benchmark to take 
advantage of the increasing demand 
for early stage feed against a limited 
artemia supply and will therefore 
contribute to the overall growth in the 
shrimp industry by making available 
a novel alternative to artemia

Genetics
 • Strong sales growth in Genetics 
with a 47% increase, driven by 
increasing demand for salmon 
products with salmon egg sales up 
on prior year in every major market

 • Launch of new salmon strain 
resistant to infectious salmon 
anaemia (ISA), developed using 
genomic selection tools 

 • Development of pathogen resistant 
shrimp broodstock for the Asian 
market progressing well, with field 
trials underway

 • Integration of Genetics division 

which now includes salmon, shrimp 
and tilapia and has customers in 
Europe, North and Latin America 
and Asia

 • New land-based production  

facility in Norway through joint 
venture with Salten Stamfisk AS 
received first batch of broodstock, 
post period end

Animal Health  
(medicines and vaccines)
 • Sales in Animal Health decreased 
from £24.8m to £15.1m driven 
by a drop in sales of Salmosan® 
as a result of the continuing 
development of lice resistance to 
the product, and the consequent 
use of alternative mechanical lice 
removal tools in the industry
 • Post period end, commencement 
of field trials for Ectosan®, 
Benchmark’s new sea lice treatment 
for the salmon industry 
 • Development of CleanTreat® 

an innovative water purification 
system that avoids contamination 
of marine waters from medicinal 
treatments of fish

 • Successful performance in  

field trials of sea bass nodavirus 
vaccine, with volumes growing
 • First commercial scale production  
at the new Braintree vaccine 
antigen manufacturing facility
 • Continued progress in pipeline  
of 41 products of which 7 are  
in regulatory phase and 10 are in 
pre-regulatory development trials

1  Like for like includes three months’ preacquisition results from unaudited 
INVE Aquaculture Group management information and unaudited eleven 
months proforma results for Genetica Spring SAS in the comparative period. 
See Financial Review Section page 74.

2  Adjusted EBITDA — Earnings before tax, interest, depreciation and 

amortisation before exceptional including and acquisition related items.  
See Financial Review Section on page 73.

3 Net debt is cash and cash equivalents less loans and borrowings.

01

STRATEGIC 
REPORT

08  Benchmark at a Glance

10  Our Sites

12  2017 Milestones

14 

 Market Overview

18  Chairman’s Statement

22  Strategic Review

28  Business Review

30  Genetics

36  Advanced Nutrition

42  Animal Health

48   Knowledge Services

54  Business Model

56 

 Environmental, Social  
& Governance (ESG)

64  Our People 

72  Financial Review 

78  Risk Management

80 

 Principal Risks  
and Uncertainties

Genetics

Advanced
Nutrition

Animal
Health

Knowledge
Services

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATI ON

WHAT HAS BEEN YOUR MOST MEMORABLE   
EVENT WHILE WORKING AT BENCHMARK?

The work and results around our R&D 
project, SalmoResist, has been very 
compelling, and talking about it and 
getting to share it for the world during 
Aqua Nor was great fun.

Borghild Hillestad  
Genetics Manager

07

 
 
 
 
BENCHMARK AT A GLANCE

DRIVING THE  
BLUE REVOLUTION  
WITH TECHNOLOGY

 Benchmark brings together technology 
and fundamental biology to deliver 
products and solutions that support 
producers throughout the growth cycle

Broodstock

Hatchery

Nursery

Grow-out

Knowledge Services
Insight and training to inform 
our product development and 
support our customers

Health
A leading innovator 
in aquaculture health 

Advanced Nutrition
Number 1 advanced nutrition 
and health solution provider 
to the aquaculture hatchery 
and nursery market 

Genetics
Leading global aquaculture 
genetics company

Large scale production facilities  
in 7 countries, covering the  
main aquaculture regions and 
supported by a network of R&D  
and commercial operations in  
an additional 20 countries

Products in pipeline1 

70
952

People

Customers

1,435
£15m
£707m

Total pipeline peak  
projected sales 

Investment in R&D (FY17)

1 New products and enhancements to current product line.

09

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Strategic ReportSTRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONOUR SITES

2017 INVESTMENTS

SHRIMP

MANUFACTURING

SEA BASS AND   
SEA BREAM

3

4

5

2

8

1

2

4

5

3

6

7

Benchmark’s operations

SALMON

1

2

We invest in projects 
that allow us to 
scale our operations 
to increase market 
share or that create 
a competitive 
advantage and in 
all cases that are 
capable of delivering 
attractive return  
on investment.

Malcolm Pye  
Chief Executive Officer

 Warm water nutrition and 
health trials, Thailand
 • Capability for tilapia in addition  

to shrimp

 • Expansion with new 92-tank unit, 
doubling capacity to facilitate 
experimental-scale shrimp hatchery 
and on-growing stage testing
 • Amount invested in FY17: £0.1m
 • Amount invested to date: £0.2m

State-of-the-art vaccine 
antigen production facility, UK
 • All major farmed species
 • Aquaculture vaccines
 • 2,500-square-metre  
production facility 

 • Capability for large-scale  
antigen manufacture and  
pipeline products testing 
 • EU Good Manufacturing  
Practices (GMP) compliant
 • Amount invested in FY17: £1.0m
 • Amount invested to date: £16.1m

Warm water nutrition  
and health trials, Italy
 • Capacity for larval and juvenile 
replicate and commercial-scale 
testing, rotifer and artemia 
production test and analytical  
lab facilities

 • Annual fry production capacity  

of 4 million

 • Amount invested in FY17: £0.1m
 • Amount invested to date: £0.2m

TILAPIA

6

GROUP R&D

7

8

Land-based broodstock  
facility, Norway
 • 10,000 square-metre, fully-

biosecure joint venture facility 

 • Capacity to produce over  

150 million ova per year to  
meet demand

 • Year-round production
 • Amount invested in FY17: £20.5m
 • Amount invested to date: £21.8m

Lumpfish hatcheries,  
Scotland and Iceland
 • Capacity to produce 3 million 
lumpfish per year, a biological 
control against sea lice

 • Expanded capacity in Iceland,  
two new sites in Scotland

 • Amount invested in FY17: £1.3m
 • Amount invested to date: £3.4m

Breeding centre, Miami
 • Increased biosecurity
 • Doubling of capacity to 20-million 

fingerlings per year

 • Amount invested in FY17: £0.3m
 • Amount invested to date: £0.3m

New hatchery, Brazil
 • Capacity to produce 1 million  

high-quality fingerlings per month 

 • Leading-edge equipment and 

biosecurity 

 • Amount invested in FY17: £0.1m
 • Amount invested to date: £0.2m

Aquaculture trials  
facility, Scotland
 • Home office licensed 
 • Speeding up delivery  
of pipeline products 

 • Amount invested in FY17: £0.5m
 • Amount invested to date: £4.9m

11

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Strategic ReportSTRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATION2017 MILESTONES

Activities during the year to deliver on 

BENCHMARK'S 
STRATEGY

Benchmark’s strategy is to take a 
leadership position in aquaculture 
technology, tackling deep-rooted issues 
in established markets and securing 
an early mover advantage in less 
developed, high growth markets. 

Our strategy is driven by our customers' 
needs, a commitment to sustainability 
and the goal to deliver attractive 
returns for shareholders. 

Ways in which we execute our strategy:

1.  When developing new products, we 
apply the insights gained from our 
customer relationships, partnerships 
and front line veterinary services 

2.  We combine the fundamental 

biology disciplines to create a strong 
technology platform across products 
and services 

3.  We use technology and innovation to 
develop a range of complementary 
and proprietary products that 
address unmet needs 

4.  We develop products capable  

of achieving high margins and an 
attractive return on investment

5.  We seek to capture cross-selling 
opportunities resulting from our 
broad range of products and our 
global distribution network 

6.  We build and operate secure and 

scalable manufacturing capabilities 
to support our growth

Image: Benchmark’s new land-based 
salmon broodstock facility, Norway.

March 2017

May 2017

June 2017

Long-term agreement signed with  
major salmon producer, SalMar,  
to provide genetics, health and 
knowledge services.

Distribution deal signed with Thailand’s 
largest tilapia fry and feed provider, 
Manit Farm, to supply tilapia nutrition 
and health products.

New tilapia hatchery opened  
in Brazil with capacity to supply  
one-million-fish per-month to the  
high-growth domestic market.

June 2017

June 2017

July 2017

Development of pancreas disease (PD) 
resistant strain in collaboration with 
industry partners.

Inaugural ‘Aquaculture UK 2017’ 
conference draws sector stars and 
record numbers to Scotland.

Launch of new probiotic to enhance 
shrimp performance and growth.

August 2017

August 2017

September 2017

Announcement of CleanTreat®, an 
innovative purification system allowing 
the use of medicinal bath treatments 
without water contamination.

Renewal of key sales and marketing 
agreement and entry into strategic 
distribution agreement with Great Salt 
Lake Brine Shrimp Cooperative, Inc.

Operations commenced at our 
brand-new £16m aquaculture vaccine 
production facility in Braintree, UK.

13

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Strategic ReportSTRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONMARKET OVERVIEW

PROGRESSIVELY 
ELIMINATING 
AQUACULTURE’S 
PRODUCTION 
CONSTRAINTS

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATI ON

Total aquaculture production is estimated to  
grow 3-4% in volume terms 2018 (Rabobank 2017)

But the industry is young and  
faces significant challenges:

Forecast

Disease is aquaculture’s  
most limiting factor

$1bn

lost annually due to  
streptococcus in tilapia4

40%

of shrimp production is  
lost to disease annually2

$500m

cost of sea lice in salmon3

0
1950

1960

1970

1980

1990

2000

2010

2020

Source: Rabobank

Wild catch

Aquaculture

This leads to volatility in supply

Growth will be enabled by innovation:

YOY change in global farmed 
Atlantic Salmon supply and forecast (%)

Genetics, Nutrition, Health including vaccines  
& treatments and Know-how.

Infectious
Salmon
Anaemia
(ISA) outbreak
(Chile)

Lice and Algae
Bloom (Chile)

Genetics technology is one of the primary drivers  
of efficient production. Like health care, genetics is 
consistently high margin with a high barrier to entry.

Increased professionalisation of the industry is  
creating demand for technically advanced nutritional  
and health products.

It is increasingly important to cooperate through the  
value chain to combat diseases and pathogens which  
has been a driver of M&A in the industry. Benchmark  
works across the full production lifecycle.

2 0 0 1

2 0 0 2

2 0 0 3

2 0 0 4

2 0 0 5

2 0 0 6

2 0 0 7

2 0 0 8

2 0 0 9

2 0 1 0

2 0 1 1

2 0 1 2

2 0 1 3

2 0 1 4

2 0 1 5 E

2 0 1 6 E

2 0 1 7 E

Source: Rabobank, Kontali, Subsecretaria de Pesca, 2016

Total seafood supply

200

180

160

140

120

100

80

60

40

20

s
e
n
n
o
t

n
o

i
l
l
i

M

25%

20%

15%

10%

5%

0%

–5%

–10%

Human consumption 
of fish has now 
overtaken that of 
beef, and aquaculture 
accounts for half of all 
the fish people eat.1

Seafood demand drivers:
 • Growing population
 • Healthy food trend — omega 3,  

low saturated fats

 • Indulgence trend — looking for  
new food experiences and variety

 • Supply side marketing push
 • Urbanisation* — better logistics, 
availability and food service
 • Income effect* — switch to  

proteins and prestige products

1  FAO, State of the World’s Fisheries  

and Aquaculture 2016.

* Mostly relevant in developing countries.

Aquaculture is the fastest growing food producing sector. Benchmark’s key aquaculture markets:

Shrimp

5%

Projected growth  
(2015–2019)5

Tilapia

5-10%

Projected growth  
per annum6

Salmon

5-7%

Projected growth  
(2018–2020)6

The highest value aquaculture industry 
world-wide. Biological issues likely 
to drive a potential need for a new 
business model.

World’s second most farmed fish. 
Technology has played an important 
role in the development of the industry.

Highly innovative, established market. 
Sea lice issues are restricting growth.

2  Stentiford, G.D. (2012) Disease will limit future 
food supply from the global crustacean fishery 
and aquaculture sectors, Journal of Invertebrate 
Pathology 110:141–157.

3 Rabobank data. 

4  USDA (2017) A Big Step towards Reducing Strep 

5  GOAL (2017) Global Shrimp  

Production Review and Forecast.

in Farm-Raised Tilapia.

6 Rabobank, 2017.

15

 
CASE STUDY: Salmon

SEA LICE 
the challenge

The World's 20 largest salmon farmers

2,000,000

Tonnes of Atlantic salmon  
is farmed every year1

Marine Harvest

Lerøy Seafood Group

Cermaq

SalMar

Cooke Aquaculture

Grieg Seafood

Multiexport

Bakkafrost

Nordlaks

AquaChile

Nova Sea

Pesquera Los Fiordos

Alsaker Fjordbruk

Camanchaca

Australis Seafoods

SinkaBerg-Hansen

Blumar

Norway Royal Salmon

Bremnes Seashore

The Scottish Salmon Company

Source: Salmon Business

N°1

Sea lice is the salmon  
industry’s number one  
disease challenge

$

$500m

Sea lice cost the  
industry an estimated  
$500m per year to treat2

18mm

Sea lice grow to  
5-6mm (males) and  
8-18mm (females)

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATI ON

THE SOLUTION
Benchmark has developed a range of products 
and services to help producers protect against 
and combat sea lice, including:

 • Veterinary services to assess the  
challenge and prescribe treatment 

 • Sea lice resistant salmon eggs 
 • Salmosan®, Benchmark’s established  

sea lice treatment  

 • Biological controls to eat the lice  

i.e. lump fish

 • Ectosan®, Benchmark's new sea lice 
treatment for the salmon industry,  
currently in commercial field trials

Top salmon producing countries 20163 (tonnes GWE*)

Faroe Islands

69,600

Scotland

144,100

Norway

1,054,000

North America

148,100

Ireland

13,400

Chile

454,000

1 Salmon Farming Handbook, Marine Harvest.

2 Rabobank data.

3 Salmon Farming Handbook.

* Gutted Weight Equivalent.

Australia

48,600

17

CHAIRMAN’S STATEMENT

A YEAR OF 
SIGNIFICANT 
OPERATIONAL 
AND STRATEGIC 
PROGRESS

What is predictable  
is that the demand for 
our products, driven 
by growth in demand 
for our customers’ 
products, is showing 
long-term growth.

Alex Hambro  
Chairman

Introduction 

I am pleased to report on another  
year of significant operational and 
strategic progress for Benchmark 
Holdings. Despite certain challenges, 
we have put in place important 
technological, and infrastructure and 
organisational building blocks which 
will allow the Company to deliver 
substantial shareholder value in the 
future. At the same time, we continued 
to develop our leadership position in 
aquaculture; indeed, Benchmark is 
now one of the leading global providers 
of advanced nutrition, genetics and 
animal health in the industry.

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATI ON

New technologies 

Whilst the introduction of new 
technologies and the nature of 
biological assets is unpredictable, 
Benchmark has developed an 
increasingly diversified, rich seam 
of technology, which it now deploys 
across multiple species and in  
multiple geographies. We have  
a highly skilled team of people  
who are creating enduring solutions 
to address the commercial and 
environmental challenges facing the 
global aquaculture industry and the 
past year has seen the delivery of 
some of these technologies. 

More detail is outlined in the CEO 
Report but one such example is the 
recently announced successful first 
commercial field trials of Ectosan®, 
our new sea lice treatment for the 
salmon industry, which passed 
its first field trials showing 100% 
efficacy and no environmental impact 
due to our proprietary purification 
system, CleanTreat®. This marked 
a breakthrough development for 
Benchmark and for the salmon 
industry, for which sea lice is the 
biggest disease challenge, estimated 
to have cost the industry c.$500m  
at current market prices in 2016 
(Source: Rabobank). CleanTreat®  
will, we anticipate, set a new standard 
in environmental protection by 
allowing marine fish medicines to be 
delivered safely and without in any way 
contaminating the marine environment. 
We are in the process of evaluating 
additional applications and routes to 
market for the CleanTreat® system.

There is an element of unpredictability 
in the introduction of new and 
innovative technologies and the nature 
of biological assets. For example, 
delays to introducing new products and 
the impact of both disease and climate 
have both been challenges for the 
business over the last year. However,  
I have been impressed with our ability to 
overcome these challenges during the 
year and believe that as the business 
has become more diversified, in the 
future it will be more able to mitigate 
these risks. What is predictable is that 
the demand for our products, driven by 
growth in demand for our customers’ 
products, is showing long-term growth. 

Having built Benchmark into a global 
leader in the fastest growing segment 
of the food industry, our task is now 
to ensure we successfully execute our 
plans and take advantage of the scale 
of opportunities that we see ahead, 
whilst delivering consistent and more 
predictable financial performance in 
the coming year and beyond. 

Results overview 

The year saw significant organic 
revenue growth; the Advanced Nutrition 
division grew like for like1 revenue 
by 21% over the prior year and the 
Genetics division grew sales by 47%. 
At the same time we have made much 
progress in marshalling our pipeline  
of 41 Animal Health products, of which 
7 are in regulatory phase, and 10 are 
in pre-regulatory development trials. 

Adjusted EBITDA2 increased by 9% 
to £10.0m (2016: £9.2m) and this 
together with a reduction in M&A 
activity and the associated costs 
resulted in the loss for the year 
reducing by 61% to (£7.1m) (2016: 
(£18.3m)). Net debt3 increased, as 
expected, to £23.9m including £6.0m 
of ringfenced non-recourse debt used 
to part fund capital expenditure in the 
Genetics division. Net debt is managed 
within routine leverage parameters 
to ensure that there is sufficient 
headroom in the Group’s facilities 
to meet funding requirements in the 
medium term.

1  Like for like includes three months’ preacquisition results from unaudited INVE Aquaculture Group 
management information and unaudited eleven months proforma results for Genetica Spring SAS  
in the comparative period. See Financial Review Section page 74.

2  Adjusted EBITDA — Earnings before tax, interest, depreciation and amortisation before exceptional 

including and acquisition related items. See Financial Review Section on page 73.

3 Net debt is cash and cash equivalents less loans and borrowings.

19

I believe we have created a unique 
group, comprised of a team of 
the most talented aquaculture 
professionals to be found anywhere 
in the world, and which would be 
impossible to replicate. I therefore 
thank all of Benchmark’s people for 
their hard work, commitment and 
enthusiasm which has seen the Group 
reach many very important milestones 
allowing it to grow stronger despite  
a challenging year.

The Hon. Alexander Hambro
Chairman

23 January 2018

Integration — the 
‘Benchmark solution’

Our four divisions are increasingly 
working together to deliver an 
integrated “Benchmark Solution” for 
aquaculture producers across the 
major species and geographic farming 
areas. The integration of genetics, 
advanced nutrition and health products 
into a complete offering for aquaculture 
producers will provide the Group with 
a distinct competitive advantage. Over 
the past year, the establishment of 
a key account management strategy 
has been an important operational 
focus which will drive our commercial 
development into the future.

An important part of our integration 
effort this year was the reorganisation 
of our management structure to drive 
efficiency, synergies and accountability. 
The Board and the CEO in particular 
have spent a considerable amount of 
time reorganising the way the business 
is managed, establishing divisional 
heads, cross divisional functions and 
creating a streamlined Operations Board. 

Strengthening of  
Benchmark’s Board 

One of my commitments to 
shareholders has been to further 
strengthen our Board to ensure we 
have the optimal blend of experience 
and skills to help deliver our strategy 
and shareholder value. I am particularly 
pleased therefore that we added two 
new and well regarded non-executive 
directors to our Board during the year. 
Both have extensive global experience 
in aquaculture and animal health and 
will provide the Company with strategic 
frameworks, market intelligence and 
operational insight.
 • Yngve Myhre has many years of 
operational experience in running 
and managing salmon farming 
companies in Norway, as well as 
wider fin fish executive managerial 
experience in South America and 
the Mediterranean. 

 • Hugo Wahnish was for many years 
a leading executive for the animal 
health operations of Merck and 
brings Benchmark a wealth of 
knowledge of the global animal 
health industry and the companies 
and people at its core. Having 
insight into the approach taken 
by the “big pharma” players in 
the aquaculture sector is of great 
strategic value.

We welcome them to the Board  
and look forward to their contribution 
to the strategic trajectory of the 
Company over the coming years.

We are well advanced in the process 
to recruit a Chief Scientific Officer for 
the Group who will join the Board. This 
is a key role to ensure Benchmark’s 
technology leadership into the future 
and support the execution and launch 
of our rich pipeline of products.  
We look forward to updating investors 
in due course.

During the year our colleague  
Roland Bonney stepped down from  
the Board and took a temporary  
leave of absence for medical reasons.  
We are pleased that Roland has 
recovered and has since rejoined 
Benchmark to lead our very important 
key accounts programme and as a 
member of the Operations Board. 

Sustainability

Our objective is not merely to  
grow the business; we also aim 
to do so in a sustainable and 
environmentally responsible way.  
I mention this particularly because 
we take the environmental and social 
impact of the aquaculture industry  
as a whole extremely seriously and 
as we now hold a leadership position 
in the industry, we must also show 
leadership in this respect. This is 
not only ethically responsible, but we 
believe is also good for the business. 
We will be therefore outlining our 
Environmental, Social & Governance 
(ESG) approach in more detail in this 
and in future reports.

Summary

We have built a strong platform from 
which to deliver further progress in 
2018 and beyond. We have put a new 
organisational structure in place with 
new members of the team ensuring 
we have the skill set to deliver on the 
market opportunity and make optimal 
use of the infrastructure we have built. 
Our focus is keenly on the execution 
and delivery of the Group’s projects 
which will drive growth and profitability; 
this includes the rollout of our highest 
potential new products in Genetics and 
Advanced Nutrition as well as the work 
on the commercialisation of Ectosan®, 
together with the continuous leverage 
of our Group capabilities in cross-
selling and shared development.

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATI ON

21

STRATEGIC REVIEW

TECHNOLOGY 
DRIVING GROWTH  
IN AQUACULTURE

Technology has played  
a very important role  
in the development  
of aquaculture to date.  
From genetics to feed  
and medicines, in  
addition to farming 
methods and equipment, 
the impact of technology 
has been substantial.

Malcolm Pye  
Chief Executive Officer

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATI ON

Overview

2017 was a transitional year for 
Benchmark. After three years of heavy 
investment and acquisitions to build a 
platform of products and technologies 
with strong market positions, our focus 
during the year was on strengthening 
and aligning the organisation for the 
next phase of our growth. The key 
tasks were:
 • reviewing the organisational 

structure leading to a post year  
end implementation; 

 • recruiting new team members to 
complement and upskill the team;
 • creating new functions to address 
key areas including Investor 
Relations (IR), scientific leadership 
(CSO) and marketing; and
 • integrating the organisation and 
developing a “One Benchmark” 
culture to realise the benefits 
inherent in the Group.

In addition to Ectosan®, we faced 
challenges in Advanced Nutrition, 
where climate and disease outbreaks 
affected the shrimp sector during 
the first half of the year adversely 
impacting on demand for our products. 
There was a recovery in the second 
half and like for like sales for the 
year were up 21%1, a positive result 
for the division. Biological disease 
is a feature of our industry which 
affects predictability, but our growing, 
diversified portfolio of products 
increasingly mitigates this risk. 

Sales in our Genetics division grew 
strongly as well, by 47% to £30.5m 
(2016: £20.7m), driven by increased 
demand for our salmon eggs which 
were up on prior year in every major 
market. Our new state-of-the-art land 
based broodstock facility in Norway, 
with capacity to produce over 150 
million ova per year, will enable us to 
continue to develop this market. The 
first broodstock has been delivered 
and salmon eggs from this stock will 
be produced in early Autumn 2018. 

We now have an execution driven  
team and structure. We have one 
important gap to fill in terms of our 
team, namely that of a Chief Scientific 
Officer (CSO) who will be responsible 
for leading our R&D effort and for 
delivering our pipeline. The CSO  
will join the Board in recognition  
of the importance of the role for 
Benchmark as a science-led, 
technology business, and I hope  
to report on an appointment in the 
near future. 

Challenges during the year

There were however a few setbacks 
in the period, notably the delay 
experienced in the launch of the 
commercial field trials phase for 
Ectosan®, our new sea lice treatment; 
this was exacerbated by the impact 
from the anticipated drop in sales 
of Salmosan® as a result of the 
development of partial resistance to 
the product and the industry focus on 
mechanical treatments. The increased 
complexity from the addition of the 
CleanTreat® system to the Ectosan® 
solution required the delay, but critically 
has created new opportunities for 
the Group. We are pleased that 
commercial trials for Ectosan® have 
now commenced delivering excellent 
results so far and confirming the very 
significant potential of this product in 
the market.

Benchmark Strategy
 • Take a leadership position in aquaculture technology,  

where commercially attractive

 • Seek a first-mover advantage in high-growth markets  

where appropriate 

 • Tackle deep-rooted aquaculture issues in more  

mature aquaculture markets

 • Deliver attractive shareholder returns

1  Like for like includes three months’ preacquisition results from unaudited INVE Aquaculture Group 
management information and unaudited eleven months proforma results for Genetica Spring SAS  
in the comparative period. See Financial Review Section page 74.

23

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATI ON

The new SPR shrimp is the result 
of over 20 years’ experience in our 
teams in Colombia and Norway and 
will be sold using our Advanced 
Nutrition distribution network in Asia, 
demonstrating the value of having 
created a global multi-product platform. 

Another element of our strategy is 
to expand into newly industrialised 
farmed species. This is an area in 
which we made good progress in 
the year, signing a deal to supply 
Thailand’s largest tilapia fry and feed 
provider, Manit Farm, with advanced 
nutrition and health products, and 
opening our own tilapia hatchery in 
Brazil with capacity to supply one 
million fish per month to the high 
growth Brazilian market.

Outlook 

The fundamental drivers of our market 
remain favourable and we continue 
to see new growth opportunities in 
the sector. The outlook for our core 
species is positive with salmon 
production expected to grow strongly 
in the next two years and shrimp 
production recovering. We continue  
to execute our strategy, leveraging the 
platform we have built in recent years 
and making steady progress in the 
development of our pipeline.

Current trading is in line with the 
Board expectations and we expect to 
deliver on our strategic and financial 
objectives for the year.

Our Advanced Nutrition and Genetics 
businesses are mature, established 
businesses, each with 20 to 30 
years’ presence in the market and 
leading positions. We are focused 
on leveraging our market position 
to realise opportunities across the 
group from presenting an integrated 
product offering to our customers, 
realising cross-selling opportunities 
and sharing technology and know-how. 
An important element of this strategy 
which was initiated this year is our key 
accounts programme.

Product Development 

In addition to the progress with 
Ectosan®, new products were launched 
in our genetics and advanced nutrition 
businesses, some of which represent 
an addition to our product offering 
such as the Infectious Salmon 
Anaemia (ISA) resistant ova, and  
Sano-life GUT, while others are an 
upgrade to existing products like  
Sano-life PRO 2 in the area of 
advanced nutrition. Technology 
upgrades are an important part of 
our product development strategy. 
They enable us to strengthen our 
competitive position with limited 
product adoption risk. Good progress 
was made with the Group’s pipeline 
of new products during the year and 
we now have 15 products in the final 
phase of development across the Group.

Post period end we announced the 
development of a specific pathogen 
resistant (“SPR”) shrimp to address 
the challenges in the Asian market 
including white spot, early mortality 
syndrome and vibriosis. We are at 
an early stage, but this is an exciting 
project with the potential to unlock 
production capacity in the largest 
shrimp market by tackling disease. 

Image: Benchmark vets on site with  
Sonja Brown of Loch Duart, Scotland.

25

CASE STUDY: Salmon

The use of genomic tools could 

 REVOLUTIONISE 
THE SEAFOOD 
INDUSTRY

Studying the genes that control 
characteristics helps breeders 
select desirable traits in parents 
and offspring. Selection methods 
using new genomic technologies 
has the potential to more than 
double the genetic gain from one 
generation to the next. This is due 
to higher accuracy and individual 
selection, compared to traditional 
family breeding.

Genomic tools in aquaculture 
were prohibitively expensive 
in the past, but recent 
progress is starting to bring 
the costs down making them 
more accessible.

In studies carried out by 
Benchmark’s SalmoBreed, 
Nofima and several other 
partners, fish with high 
breeding value for PD had  
a survival rate close to 90 
per cent, while for fish with 
low breeding value it was  
just below 60 per cent. 

Image: Salmon ova and alevins close up, Lønningdal, Norway.

STRATEGIC   
STRATEGIC   
REPORT
REPORT

GOVERNANCE
GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATI ON
INFORMATI ON

Genomic selection is a significant tool  
in the fight against pancreas disease.  
By breeding from individuals that have the 
desired gene composition, we are able to 
deliver fish with ever increasing resistance 
to PD, generation after generation.

Jan-Emil Johannessen 
Head of Benchmark Genetics

27

 
2017 
BUSINESS  
REVIEW

We have made history this year with the 
development of Ectosan®and CleanTreat®and 
the impact it has had on sea lice. I am proud  
to be part of a team that develops products that 
are making a real difference to the industry, 
environment and the future of food production.

Matt Haslam 
Head of CleanTreat® 
Benchmark Animal Health 

Image: Benchmark's Matt Haslam and Robert Reilly  
visiting a salmon farmer in Scotland.

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATI ON

MARKET DRIVERS:
 • Proliferation of disease 
 • Drive to eliminate antibiotics in the food chain 
 • Continuous end-product quality improvement
 • Need for environmentally friendly solutions 
 • Enhancing productivity of established farmed species 
 • Making newly farmed species economically viable

29

DIVISIONAL REVIEW — GENETICS

BREEDING 

for the future with  
genomic precision

We select the best performing fish  
and magnify their genetic strengths from 
generation to generation. We are seeing 
an increasing demand for our disease-
resistant ova to help the industry combat 
disease challenges and support growth.

Jan-Emil Johannessen 
Head of Genetics 

21%

FY17 revenue 
contribution

8

Sites

128

Employees

HISTORY

Benchmark Genetics was established in 2014 through 
the acquisitions of StofnFiskur (Iceland) and SalmoBreed 
(Norway), two of the top three players in salmon genetics, 
each with more than 30 years’ presence in the market. 
Following these acquisitions for a total of £52.4m, Benchmark 
became the leading player in salmon genetics. Further 
acquisitions totalling £13.5m were made in 2015 and 2016  
to add a presence and expertise in shrimp and tilapia. 

PRODUCTS

Atlantic salmon, tilapia and shrimp eggs/hatchery stage/
breeding animals and genetic services for multiple species.

31

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Strategic ReportSTRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONDIVISIONAL REVIEW — GENETICS

OPERATIONAL 
PROGRESS

Strengthened 
infrastructure in  
key growth markets

 • Salmon production facility in Iceland now able to grow broodfish to 4–5 kg (similar to 
market size) within 11 months, due to investments and improvements. Previously the 
same production took approximately 16–18 months

 • New tilapia hatchery opened by the Group in São Paolo, Brazil, with capacity to produce  

up to 1 million high-quality tilapia fingerlings a month

 • Newly expanded tilapia genetics site in Miami with capacity to produce up to 20 million 

fingerlings per year

 • New 10,000 square-metre on-land salmon broodstock facility receives its first batch 
of broodstock. The land-based facility is the first of its kind in Norway, with capacity to 
produce 150 million ova per year, post period end

New products

 • Specific pathogen resistant (SPR) shrimp developed for the Asian market, the largest and 
fastest growing market for shrimp, announced post-period end with field trials underway
 • Launch of new trait, GS-AGD, to increase natural resistance in Atlantic salmon to amoebic 

gill disease

 • Launch of new ova resistant to infectious salmon anaemia (ISA). ISA causes high 

mortality and significant monetary losses in affected salmon farms worldwide, and  
is a major welfare issue

Partnerships

 • Long-term agreement with one of the world’s largest salmon producers, SalMar, to  

provide a full suite of services encompassing genetics, health and knowledge services

Innovation and 
integration

 • Breeding breakthrough for fish with increased natural resistance to pancreas disease  

(PD) achieved by Benchmark's SalmoBreed, Nofima and other partners

 • Integration of Genetics division which now includes salmon, shrimp and tilapia and  

has customers in Europe, North and Latin America and Asia

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATI ON

FINANCIAL 
PERFORMANCE

Benchmark Genetics delivered strong growth in Adjusted 
EBITDA with the main drivers being increased sales volumes 
and average sales prices for salmon eggs resulting from 
customer demand and the success of new products 
launched. The valuation of biological assets increased by 
£4.2m driven by the growth in sales in the year and strong 
order book at the year end. This supported strong growth in 
gross margins for the division and, after expensed R&D of 
£2.7m (2016: £2.2m), Adjusted EBITDA grew by 314% to 
£5.8m (2016: £1.4m).

Genetics Division Revenue

Summary Income Statement

Revenue

Cost of Sales

Gross Profit

Research and  
development costs

Operating costs 

Adjusted EBITDA

2017

2016

£30.5m

Exceptional including acquisition 
related items

£20.7m

Depreciation and amortisation

Operating profit /(loss)

2017 
£m

2016 
£m

30.5 

20.7 

(13.8)

(13.5)

16.7 

7.2 

(2.7)

(2.2)

(8.2)

(3.6)

5.8 

7.0 

(3.3)

9.5 

1.4 

(2.4)

(2.6)

(3.6)

Genetics Division Adjusted EBITDA

2017

2016

£1.4m

£5.8m

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Strategic Report

33

CASE STUDY: Shrimp

 Disease has cost the Asian  
shrimp sector more than 
$20bn OVER THE 
LAST 7 YEARS 1

Benchmark’s new Specific Pathogen Resistant (SPR) 
shrimp have proven resistance to a number of diseases.

60%

Production of farmed  
shrimp is expected to  
grow by 50 to 60%  
through to 20302

The genetics sector has a high  
barrier to entry due to the technical 
nature of the business and the length 
of time it would take to find desirable 
traits, select and then reproduce the 
stock. In 2016 Benchmark acquired 
a South American shrimp breeding 
programme to expand into the  
fast-growing shrimp sector.

It is from this point that Benchmark 
has a unique opportunity. Taking the 
learnings from our well-established 
breeding programmes in salmon and 
deploying this know-how into other 
major farmed species that are less 
technically developed. 

This year trials have commenced in 
Asia with Benchmark’s new specific 
pathogen resistant (SPR) shrimp to 
address the issues facing the Asian 
market. The Asian shrimp industry 
alone incurred a loss of $22.5bn from 
AHPND (previously known as Early 
Mortality Syndrome — EMS) over the 
period 2009 to 2016.1 Benchmark's 
SPR shrimp have proven resistance to 
major diseases and early indications 
also suggest that our stocks hold 
resistance to AHPND.

1  Shinn, A.P., Pratoomyot, J., Griffiths, D., Trong, T.Q., Vu, N.T., Jiravanichpaisal, J. & Briggs. M. (in press) 

Asian shrimp production and the economic costs of disease. Asian Fisheries Science Journal.

2 World Bank, Fish to 2030.

Shrimp farmers globally are seeking 
robust shrimp adapted to local conditions 
to stabilize production. Benchmark’s 
shrimp lines resistance to key pathogens 
and their genetic diversity has enormous 
potential to do just that. Benchmark has 
the veterinarians, breeds, and the delivery 
and distribution through INVE to help 
the global shrimp industry.

Oscar Hennig  
Operations Director of Benchmark’s  
shrimp breeding facility

35

STRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATION 
DIVISIONAL REVIEW — ADVANCED NUTRITION

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATI ON

After decades of innovation we  
have seen aquaculture evolve from  
small-scale pioneering to the industry  
it is today. We aim to further support  
this evolution and shape the future  
of aquaculture with our customers  
by caring for their long-term growth.

Philippe Léger  
Head of Advanced Nutrition 

 High performance and cost-effective 

NUTRITIONAL  
SOLUTIONS

58%

FY17 revenue 
contribution

14

Sites

461

Employees

HISTORY

Advanced Nutrition was added to Benchmark’s portfolio of 
products and services in 2015 when the Company acquired 
INVE Aquaculture, a world-leading provider of specialist 
nutrition and health solutions to the shrimp and finfish 
market, including sea bass and sea bream. 

PRODUCTS

Live feed (artemia), enrichment diets, compound larval 
hatchery feeds, advanced health products including probiotics 
and soil and water treatments.

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Strategic Report

37

DIVISIONAL REVIEW — ADVANCED NUTRITION

OPERATIONAL 
PROGRESS

Strengthened 
infrastructure in key 
growth markets

 • Key account programme established covering marine fish, salmon, tilapia and shrimp  

to centralise and coordinate Benchmark’s offering

 • Expansion and renovation of Benchmark’s sea bass and bream testing facility in Tuscany, 
Italy and of our testing facility for tropical species (shrimp and tilapia) in Chonburi, Thailand

 • Initiation of probiotics production and completion of GMP certification

New product launches 
and contract wins

 • Commercial launch of enhanced shrimp probiotics Sanolife GUT and Sanolife PRO-2 

building on Sanolife’s strong brand within the industry

 • TomAlgae products fully integrated into the Advanced Nutrition product portfolio
 • New contract signed with KA-Key Distributor in Honduras to serve Honduras, Costa Rica, 

Venezuela and Guatemala

 • Distribution agreement signed with Manit Farms to supply tilapia products in Thailand
 • Renewal and expansion of long-term sales and marketing agreement with Great  

Salt Lake artemia cooperative. This agreement generated revenues of over £30m  
for Benchmark in 2016

Increasing  
market share

 • Double digit growth in replacement diets (20 per cent vs prior year) and health  

products (33 per cent vs prior year) under difficult market conditions, including Early 
Mortality Syndrome (EMS) in Vietnam and China, and whitespot outbreak in Brazil
 • Overall revenue growth of 8 per cent vs prior year as a result of achieving maximum 

sustainable volumes of Artemia:
 • Strong growth in the Americas shrimp market including Ecuador 
 • Launch of new initiatives in the stagnating Mediterranean marine fish markets

Innovation

 • R&D releases achieved for four pipeline products: Hi-5 IL, non-GSL Artemia,  

HI-5 Defence, Sanolife PRO-2+, Easy Dry Selco

 • Four year research project on pond bottom management underway with the University  

of Ghent, Belgium

 • Major milestones reached in our 100 per cent Artemia replacement projects  

for shrimp and fish:
 • SmART Shrimp: milestone of 95 per cent Artemia replacement achieved
 • SmART Fish: milestone of 95 per cent Artemia replacement exceeded

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATI ON

Summary Income Statement

Revenue

Cost of Sales

Gross Profit

Research and  
development costs

Operating costs 

Adjusted EBITDA

Exceptional including acquisition 
related items

2017 
£m

2016 
£m

83.7 

55.0 

(42.8)

(26.5)

40.9 

28.5 

(3.0)

(1.3)

(20.2)

(11.3)

17.7 

15.9 

(0.0)

0.0 

Depreciation and amortisation

(16.6)

(11.4)

Operating (loss)/profit

1.1 

4.5 

FINANCIAL 
PERFORMANCE

Advanced Nutrition’s increased revenue growth of £28.7m  
was driven by increased market share and demand for  
higher margin live feed replacement and health diets plus 
the inclusion of a full year’s sales of the INVE business  
(vs nine months of trading post acquisition in 2016).

The Division experienced lower growth rates in the first  
half year but key markets continued to recover through  
the second half. This recovery aided strong growth in higher 
margin live feed replacement and health diets. Market  
prices for some live feed products were impacted by 
significant oversupply in Asia and this resulted in reduced 
gross margin from this product category. An exceptional bad  
debt provision of £1.1m was made in the year for a single 
debtor related to sales made in 2016. After this provision 
and after expensed R&D of £3m (2016: £1.3m) the division 
reported Adjusted EBITDA of £17.7m (2016: £15.9m — 
nine months post acquisition). 2016 like for like Adjusted 
EBITDA was £17.3m.

Advanced Nutrition Division Revenue

2017

2016

£83.7m

£55.0m

Advanced Nutrition Division Adjusted EBITDA

2017

2016

£17.7m

£15.9m

1  Like for like includes three months’ preacquisition results from unaudited 
INVE Aquaculture Group management information and unaudited eleven 
months proforma results for Genetica Spring SAS in the comparative period. 
See Financial Review Section page 74.

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Strategic Report

39

STRATEGIC   
STRATEGIC   
REPORT
REPORT

GOVERNANCE
GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATI ON
INFORMATI ON

CASE STUDY: Tilapia

STREPTOCOCCUS 

 is one of the most devastating 
diseases in tilapia

The disease predominantly affects 
countries in Latin America and 
Asia. It can cause substantial 
mortalities of large fish and causes 
farmers heavy economic losses.

The solution

Benchmark has built a pioneering  
and complimentary preventative 
approach including vaccine 
development, specialist nutrition  
and an advanced family-based  
breeding programme for Nile tilapia 
that selects stock for key traits 
including increased resistance  
to Streptococcus iniae and 
Streptococcus agalactiae.

Weakened fish are especially 
susceptible to the illness. Our 
approach ensures we look at  
the health of the full animal:
 • Strong genetics result in a greater 
level of disease resistance 

 • Probiotic nutrition helps  

immune stimulation to fend  
off diseases naturally 

 • Healthier fish respond better  

to vaccines

The combination of fry genetics, biosecurity measures, 
and specific management protocols — through product 
and strong technical support — will allow farmers to 
cost-efficiently produce quality fish.

Olivier Decamp  
INVE’s Farm & Feedmill Product Manager

$6.7bn

Global tilapia production 
($6.7bn USD 2015)

$1bn 

Lost annually due  
to streptococcus1

2nd

Most farmed  
fish globally2

1 USDA (2017) A Big Step towards Reducing Strep in Farm-Raised Tilapia.

2 Rise of the Aquatic Chicken, Rabobank 2015.

Image: Courtesy of CDC.

41

 
DIVISIONAL REVIEW — ANIMAL HEALTH

Cutting-edge 

HEALTH  
PRODUCTS

 targeted at the major  
disease challenges

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATI ON

Our pipeline is progressing well. We use 
our market insight from the business to 
develop products targeted at the industry’s 
largest unmet disease issues and emerging 
challenges. We are working on some 
potential game-changers.

John Marshall  
Head of Benchmark Animal Health

11%

FY17 revenue 
contribution

10

Sites

177

Employees

HISTORY

Benchmark Animal Health was established through  
the acquisition of Fish Vet Group in 2003, the Company’s  
first-move into aquaculture. Following this Benchmark  
acquired Novartis Animal Health vaccine manufacturing  
plant whilst organically growing the product pipeline.  
The product development team was built through  
a number of key strategic hires from the aquaculture 
pharmaceutical industry. 

PRODUCTS

Vaccines, medicines, biocides, parasiticides, veterinary  
health services and diagnostics.

Image: Benchmark vets monitor the 
gill health of salmon in Scotland.

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Strategic Report

43

 
DIVISIONAL REVIEW — ANIMAL HEALTH

OPERATIONAL 
PROGRESS

Innovative 
breakthroughs  
in market

 • Post period end, successful field trials of Benchmark’s new generation sea lice  

treatment, proven in trials to be 100 per cent effective against sea lice 
 • Launch of CleanTreat®, Benchmark’s new fully contained purification system  
which will be used in conjunction with sea lice treatments, ensuring there  
is no impact on the environment

 • Second generation vaccine technology passed proof of concept and fast tracking  

to field trials during 2018

Increasing 
manufacturing  
firepower and 
commercial delivery

 • Operations commenced at the new vaccine antigen production facility in Braintree, UK. 
The facility processed its first commercial-scale batch of antigen in September 2017
 • Benchmark’s aquaculture vaccines are now being manufactured at the Braintree facility, 

speeding up the delivery of vaccines to market

 • Preparing to launch direct distribution of Byelice (Salmosan®) in Chile as a first initiative  

in strengthening the Company’s position for future product introductions 

Extracting synergies 
through strong 
distribution network

 • Integration is progressing well with vaccines from Animal Health being distributed  

in the Mediterranean through INVE’s extensive network 

 • Benchmark pipeline’s streptococcus vaccine for tilapia being developed as part  

of a total control programme linked to products in Advanced Nutrition and Genetics 

Product pipeline 
progress

 • Continued progress in our pipeline of 41 products, of which 7 are in regulatory phase,  

and 10 are in pre-regulatory development trials 

 • Successful performance in field trials of sea bass nodavirus vaccine, with volumes growing 
 • Improved R&D efficiency through better integration with Benchmark’s research facility 

Ardtoe, increasing capacity to deliver trials for pipeline products

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATI ON

FINANCIAL 
PERFORMANCE

Animal Health is in a phase of transition with a targeted 
increase in investment in new products that will deliver 
future organic growth set against a backdrop of reduced 
demand for existing mature products, primarily Salmosan®. 
Investment in expensed R&D reduced to £7.3m (2016: £8.3m) 
reflecting careful management of spend and the fact that  
an increasing proportion of R&D has to be capitalised as 
more pipeline products approach full launch. The division 
reported an increased Adjusted EBITDA loss of (£11.6m) 
(2016: loss of (£4.2m)).

Animal Health Division Revenue

Summary Income Statement

Revenue

Cost of Sales

Gross Profit

Research and development costs

Operating costs

Adjusted EBITDA

2017

2016

£15.1m

Exceptional including acquisition 
related items

£24.8m

Depreciation and amortisation

Operating loss

2017 
£m

2016 
£m

15.1 

24.8 

(13.9)

(15.0)

1.3 

9.8 

(7.3)

(5.5)

(11.6)

(0.6)

(1.4)

(13.6)

(8.3)

(5.8)

(4.2)

(0.3)

(1.5)

(6.0)

Animal Health Division Adjusted EBITDA

-£11.6m

-£4.2m

2017

2016

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Strategic Report

45

CASE STUDY: Sea bass

Nodavirus can cause up to
100% MORTALITY

148,650

Tonnes of sea bass  
produced (2016)

€300m 

Mediterranean  
sea bass market2

23%

Predicted increase in 
production 2016 to 2017, 
overtaking sea bream1

45,000

Tonnes of Mediterranean  
sea bass produced in 20153

25-30ºC

Nodavirus is highly dependent 
on water temperature. Ideal 
temperature of 25-30ºC

Nodavirus is a serious viral 
disease, primarily affecting 
farmed sea bass in Greece and 
other Mediterranean countries. 
The disease impedes growth 
and causes high production 
losses. There is currently no 
effective treatment.

The solution

Benchmark is currently  
trialling a new vaccine for  
the Mediterranean market.  
Full development of this 
product has been undertaken 
in-house covering R&D, vaccine 
manufacturing and trials.

Now in the final stages of 
development, the brand new 
Benchmark vaccine will be 
available to customers in 2018.

The development process for producing 
this vaccine for sea bass can now be readily 
adapted to bring forward vaccines for 
several other emerging farmed aquaculture 
species including Turbot, Barramundi and 
Grouper also affected by Nodavirus.

Robin Wardle  
Benchmark Vaccine Development Director

1 INVE estimate. 

2  Aquaculture in Greece 2016,  

Federation of Greek Maricultures. 

3 INVE data.

47

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Strategic ReportSTRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONDIVISIONAL REVIEW — KNOWLEDGE SERVICES

Technical know-how and 

PRACTICAL  
ADVICE

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATI ON

Knowledge unlocks the growth of  
the industries we serve. Benchmark is 
becoming increasingly recognised for 
the value we create from our research, 
training, services and events.

James Banfield  
Head of Knowledge Services

HISTORY

Knowledge Services1 has been part of Benchmark  
since its inception when Benchmark’s founders set out  
to build a business based on the growing need to create  
a sustainable and ethical future for global food production.

PRODUCTS

Conferences, cleanerfish sales, challenge tests  
(for Benchmark product pipeline), training, events  
and consultancy.

10%

FY17 revenue 
contribution

12

Sites

151

Employees

Image: Advanced nutrition 
manufacturing plant Phichit, Thailand.

1  Knowledge Services’ encompasses 

the work of Benchmark’s Sustainability 
Science and Technical Publishing.

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Strategic Report

49

DIVISIONAL REVIEW — KNOWLEDGE SERVICES

OPERATIONAL 
PROGRESS

Strengthened 
infrastructure  
in key growth  
markets

 • Successful delivery of trials at Benchmark’s Ardtoe Aquaculture Research Facility  

of the new and patented CleanTreat® water purification solution

 • Benchmark’s tilapia hatchery in Brazil is now operational. The Knowledge Services  
team is working with Benchmark Genetics to provide training to producers on best 
practice in health and welfare 

 • Supporting Benchmark’s two new lumpfish sites in the north of Scotland with training  

on welfare standards of cleanerfish, a biological control against sea lice

 • New state-of-the-art veterinary training facility opened in Sheffield, UK
 • Launch of new website for the aquaculture industry in The Fish Site and veterinary  

market through the new Vet Practice site

Growing  
market share 

 • Benchmark’s aquaculture news site increased unique visitors by five per cent in the period
 • Acquisition of Vet Practice, an industry magazine serving 10,000+ veterinary professionals

New product  
launches and  
contract wins

 • Successful conferences in VetsNorth and VetsSouth attracting over 700  

delegates and disseminating knowledge into fast evolving veterinary industry

 • Successful Aquaculture Innovation conference at Stirling University
 • Two year extension of Defra contract for the training and assurance of  

official veterinarians (OVs)

 • Further development and securing of new clients for Benchmark’s growing  

suite of data services

 • Expanded consultancy contracts with existing food producer and retailer clients,  

including McDonald’s, IKEA and KFC, and secured new long-term clients,  
including Barry Callebaut and Woolworths

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATI ON

FINANCIAL 
PERFORMANCE

Knowledge Services reported a reduced Adjusted EBITDA 
loss of (£0.9m) (2016: loss of (£1.4m)) as a result of 
increased R&D trials revenue and cost control.

Summary Income Statement

Knowledge Services Division Revenue

2017

2016

£13.8m

£11.2m

Knowledge Services Division Adjusted EBITDA

-£0.9m

-£1.4m

2017

2016

Revenue

Cost of Sales

Gross Profit

Operating costs 

Adjusted EBITDA

Exceptional including acquisition 
related items

Depreciation and amortisation

Operating loss

2017 
£m

2016 
£m

13.8 

11.2 

(9.4)

(7.0)

4.4 

4.2 

(5.2)

(0.9)

(0.1)

(1.9)

(2.9)

(5.6)

(1.4)

(0.1)

(1.0)

(2.5)

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Strategic Report

51

TECHNOLOGY CENTRE PRODUCT PIPELINES

Genetics Pipeline

Product code 
(peak projected 
sales (£), date  
of first sales 
(incl. field trials)

Pre-Project

Project phase

Test development

Launch

Salmon

Lumpfish

Tilapia

Shrimp

PF011 
(5.4m) 
2020

DH021 
(3.5m) 
2020

DH022 
(3.5m) 
2020

QF001 
(0.2m) 
2019

DS011 
(2.1m) 
2021

Genomics 
ISA  
(5.4m)

Genomics 
SRS  
(1.9m)

Genomics 
AGD  
(2.7m)

Genomics 
GS-Quality 
(0.3m)  
2018

Lumpfish 
Scotland 
(4m)

DT003  
(6m)  
2021

DT006  
(3m)  
2020

DT005  
(3m)  
2020

DT004 
(4.5m) 
2020

DT002 
(4.5m) 
2018

DT001 
(4.5m) 
2018

DP002 
(28m) 
2019

DP001 
(32m) 
2019

Total* peak projected sales: £100.5m

Total products: 14

Advanced Nutrition Pipeline

Development and lab testing

Field verification

Market preparation

Start of sales up to 1Y

SC30

SL22 
(0.1m) 
2020

SG25  
(7m)  
2019

SL18 
(0.1m)
2019

SD04 
(0.1m)

SG28 
(8.5m)

SC15  
(1m)  
2018

ART01 
(3.8m) 
2018

ART02 
(0.3m) 
2018

SC12 
(3.3m) 
2020

FD07 
(0.4m)

FD06  
(3m)

SL23 
(0.2m)

SL16 
(3.2m)

SD29  
(1.4)

Product code 
(peak projected 
sales (£), date  
of first sales 
(incl. field trials)

Marine finfish

Shrimp

SL19 
(0.3m)
2021

SD03 
(22.8m) 
2022

Shrimp/ 
marine finfish

SG27  
2020

Shrimp/ 
oyster

Tilapia

Salmon/tilapia/ 
sea bass/bream

Sea bass/bream

All species

SC11 
(2.7m) 
2021

SG26 
(1.5m) 
2021

FD05  
(7m)  
2021

SL20 
(2.2m) 
2020

Animal Health Pipeline

Product 
code (peak 
projected 
sales (£),  
date of first 
sales (incl. 
field trials)

Sea bass/
bream

Salmonids

Tilapia

Shrimp

Cleanerfish

Catfish

All species 
(aquaculture)

Companion 
animal/ 
farm animal

Discovery

Passed proof  
of concept

Development  
Trials

Regulatory  
process begins

Commercial 
launch

VAQ002 
(3m)
2019

PAQ009 
(10m)
2019

VAQ022 
(6m) 
2019

VAQ007 
(12m)
2019

VAQ011 
(3m)
2018

VAQ008  
(1m)
2018

PAQ024 
(4m) 
2021

VAQ017 
(25m) 
2021

VAQ032 
(10m) 
2019

VAQ006 
(15m) 
2019

PAQ017 
(3m) 
2022

VAQ029 
(9m) 
2020

VAQ015 
(6m) 
2020

VAQ010 
(1m) 
2018

VAQ019 
(1m) 
2019

VAQ021 
(2m) 
2019

VAQ020 
(1m) 
2019

VAQ028 
(19m) 
2019

PAQ014  
(1m)  
2018

Field  
Trials

VAQ016  
(1m)
2016

PAQ008 
(45m)  
2018

PAQ006  
(1m)

PAQ004 
(3m) 
2022

PAQ022 
(11m) 
2021

VAQ031 
(8m) 
2021

VAQ034 
(10m) 
2022

VAQ036 
(3m) 
2021

VAQ025 
(4m) 
2021

PAQ018 
(10m) 
2021

PAQ007 
(13m) 
2021

VAQ009 
(2m) 
2020

VAQ024 
(1m) 
2018

VAQ004  
(1m)  
2018

EAQ002 
(10m)  
2019

VAQ033 
(1m) 
2018

VAQ003 
(3m) 
2019

PA016 
(10m) 
2022

PAQ021 
(10m) 
2022

VC002 
(55m) 
2021

VTS009 
(50m) 
2021

VC001 
(165m) 
2021

PAQ023  
(3m)  
2019

PondDtox 
(1m)

Total* peak projected sales: £546m

Total products: 41

Total* peak projected sales: £60.7m

Total products: 15

* Not including products above with ‘launched’ status.

53

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Strategic ReportSTRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONBUSINESS MODEL

Driving performance and efficiency in the

PRODUCTION  
LIFE CYCLE

1

DEVELOPING AND COMMERCIALIZING BIOLOGICAL SOLUTIONS

Technologies 
 • Robust genetics 
 • High quality  

nutritional products

 • Health products 
including vaccines  
and treatments

Infrastructure 
 • Vaccine manufacturing 
capacity — GMP 
accredited 

 • Biosecure breeding and 
genetics production 
facilities

 • R&D and challenge  
test units — Home  
Office licensed

Distribution 
 • Long standing  
customer relationships  
in 70 countries
 • Strong distribution 
network — own and 
third party

2

FOCUSED ON KEY PRODUCTION NEEDS

Improved
disease
resistance

Lower
mortality

Lower
stress levels

Better
harvest
quality

Better
fillet
quality

Faster
growth rate

1,435 

Number of customers 

70

Customers in 70 countries

3

DELIVERING VALUE 

Customers
 • High ROI relative to substantial 

costs resulting from major disease 
challenges

 • Driving consistency in supply and 

better grow-out results

 • Supporting long-term growth and 
sustainability of their businesses

Shareholders
 • Driving shareholder value  
as the industry grows

55

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Strategic ReportSTRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONENVIRONMENTAL, SOCIAL AND GOVERNANCE (ESG)

WE ARE COMMITTED TO 
CONDUCTING BUSINESS IN 
AN ETHICAL MANNER AND 
ACTING WITH INTEGRITY

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATI ON

I’m committed to ensure we continue to 
realise value for our clients, partners and 
investors, while safeguarding society and 
the world in which we work now and in 
the future. This is the vision on which 
Benchmark was founded.

Ruth Layton 
Group Sustainability Director  
(Benchmark co-founder)

Benchmark was founded upon the need to 
build a sustainable food chain; sustainability 
is part of our DNA.

The 3Es

Increasing our impact

We continue to work closely with 
our clients, partners and wider 
stakeholders — including governments 
and industry bodies — to inform and 
influence their own standards and 
practices to ensure best practice is 
implemented as widely as possible.

Benchmark has been consistently 
guided by the ‘3Es’ framework, 
which places equal value on ethics, 
environment and economics (“3E”). 
This framework is line with ESG 
reporting frameworks and ensures  
we can pursue our commercial 
interests in a manner that ensures 
consideration and respect for:
 • Our people and partners
 • The animals under our  
care and influence
 • The communities and  
environments in which  
we operate

 • The health and safety  
of every employee
 • Our impact on the planet

Post year-end Ruth Layton  
(pictured above) was appointed  
as Group Sustainability Director  
and a sustainability working group  
and PLC Board Committee was 
established. The group is beginning 
an assessment of the Company’s 
sustainability strategy and operations 
against Benchmark’s established  
3Es framework.

The Committee will work alongside 
Benchmark’s Operations Board to 
ensure we continue to realise value 
for our clients, partners and investors 
while also safeguarding society and 
the world in which we work now and  
in the future.

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Strategic Report

57

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATI ON

ENVIRONMENTAL, SOCIAL AND GOVERNANCE (ESG)

SUCCESSFUL 
BUSINESSES  
CAN BE A FORCE  
FOR GOOD

OUR PEOPLE   
AND PARTNERS

Our people are the beating heart  
of our business. We are committed 
to building a working environment 
where health and safety is paramount 
in everything we do. In February, we 
asked every employee to sign up to 
our commitment to health and safety, 
followed by a series of workshops and 
a company-wide global safety day. 

Our Commitment to health  
and safety is as follows:
 • Nothing is more important 
than health and safety 
 • Nothing we do is worth  

being hurt for 

 • Nothing is so important  
we cannot take time to  
do it safely 

 • We will never witness an  
unsafe act or condition  
without taking action

We believe that openness and 
good communication promote a 
better culture. Our whistleblower 
channel facilitates the reporting of 
concerns about potential compliance 
issues, with regard to both laws 
and regulations, in the areas of 
environment, human and labour  
rights, equality and diversity, health 
and safety, business ethics and  
anti-corruption, conflict of interest  
and professional behaviour. 

Ethical business conduct

Benchmark employs people from 42 
different nationalities encompassing 
a variety of languages, cultures and 
customs. We are committed to high 
ethical standards in our business 
dealings worldwide and require the 
same from every member of our team. 

Our values and policies guide how 
we make decisions and what we do 
and say each day. Our values set the 
standards of behaviour we expect from 
one another, and which external parties 
can expect from us. Our policies cover 
whistleblowing, anti-fraud and anti-
corruption, financial reporting as well 
as regulatory compliance. 

ANIMAL HEALTH   
AND WELFARE

We strive to ensure the highest  
level of animal welfare throughout  
the supply chain.

Animal health and welfare is at the 
very heart of what we do. We strive  
to ensure the highest possible welfare 
potential for every animal under our 
care. By working closely with academic 
and research organisations around 
the world, we ensure our standards 
and practices are constantly informed 
by the most up-to-date science and 
research in order to keep raising the 
bar for animal health and welfare 
throughout our business and beyond.

We continue to train and educate 
our people and customers in best-
practice husbandry and prevention 
and management of key diseases. 
The aquaculture industry will only 
be able to grow successfully within 
sustainable parameters if certain 
challenges are overcome. During the 
year we have continued to invest in 
technologies to accelerate the early 
identification of new diseases and 
vaccine development as a means of 
preventing some of the leading health 
challenges. We have reached major 
milestones with two such projects: 
our CleanTreat® purification system 
enabling medical bath treatments 
to be administered with no impact 
on the marine environment, and our 

Cleanerfish programme, a biological 
control, that has reduced lice burden 
on some Scottish farms by up to  
70 per cent.

Setting the standard

RSPCA-Assured is one of the UK’s 
leading standards for farmed fish. 

Benchmark works closely with the 
RSPCA, where possible, helping to 
inform and develop standards such 
as the welfare standards for farmed 
Atlantic salmon which covers over  
90 per cent of UK farmed salmon, and 
the welfare standards for cleanerfish.

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Strategic Report

59

ENVIRONMENTAL, SOCIAL AND GOVERNANCE (ESG)

WE WANT TO HAVE  
A ‘NET POSITIVE’ 
IMPACT ON THE 
COMMUNITIES IN 
WHICH WE OPERATE

COMMUNITIES

We have supported FarmAbility, an  
on-farm day service for adults with 
autism and learning difficulties, since 
it was founded. We provide a base, 
facilities and farm access for the 
charity at our farm in Oxford, UK.

“When I get home after a 
day at FarmAbility, I feel as 
though I have been smiling 
all day. It makes me feel 
really special. The peace  
and tranquillity really helps  
to control my epilepsy. It 
gives me peace of mind.”

Hannah Crabb  
FarmAbility Co-worker  
Benchmark's supported charity

School outreach

Thailand

In Thailand we work closely with the 
local community, providing equipment 
and training in health and safety. Our 
team visited a school and donated 
tools such as fire extinguishers 
and traffic cones to create a safer 
environment for the children.

Brazil

At our farm in São Paulo we work with 
school children (9 to 11 years) from 
underprivileged areas, educating them 
about how their food is produced and 
nurturing their skills.

It’s rewarding to see the children 
working as part of a team out on the 
farm. It’s important to give them a 
sense of purpose and help them find 
enjoyment in what they are doing.

Murilo Quintiliano  
Director, Benchmark’s FAI Farms, Brazil

Image: FarmAbility staff and co-workers 
at our R&D farm in Oxford.

Image: Local school children  
at our farm in São Paulo, Brazil.

61

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Strategic ReportSTRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONENVIRONMENTAL, SOCIAL AND GOVERNANCE (ESG)

BATH TREATMENTS FOR 
SEA LICE THAT LEAVE 
NOTHING BEHIND BUT 
HEALTHY FISH AND 
CLEAN WATER

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATI ON

ENVIRONMENT

We continue to review our footprint in order identify ‘hotspots’ in  
our operations where we need to make a difference — ranging from 
improving our communication tools to reduce travel and investing in 
greener technologies through to sustainable sourcing across our entire 
supply chain and championing more sustainable alternatives such as 
cleanerfish and CleanTreat®.

Announced in August 2017, CleanTreat® is a unique purification system 
that removes all detectable medical components from treatment water 
after delousing salmon in well boats.

Chemical-based bath treatments that are released into the environment 
is one of the biggest objections to the salmon farming industry and 
CleanTreat® solves this environmental challenge.

CleanTreat® represents a transformational 
change in the battle against one of the 
industry’s greatest challenges, and a step 
towards a future where no chemicals  
are applied directly into the oceans.  
It is testament to our world-class R&D  
team to bring this idea through to market. 

John Marshall  
Head of Benchmark Animal Health 

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Strategic Report

63

OUR PEOPLE

BUILT ON 
KNOWLEDGE

 We employ a diverse and expert team from 
42 different nationalities, serving customers 
in over 70 countries. Our business is built 
on collaboration, expertise and rigorous 
ethical standards, which we require all of 
our employees to uphold.

Our business requires motivated, 
engaged people with in-depth 
technical and practical experience 
across the entire supply chain.

Anna Winton  
Head of People

Image: Benchmark salmon production  
facility in Kalmanstjørn, Iceland.

65

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Strategic ReportSTRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONLEADERSHIP TEAM

Driving efficiencies for 
our customers requires 
collaboration, progression 
and strong leadership.

Post-year end there was a re-organisation of the 
management team to further strengthen leadership and 
communication, extract synergies and drive efficiencies in 
supply and better serve our customers as a one-stop shop. 
The Operations Board is now made up of representatives 
from each division and key group functions. Alongside 
this, functional working groups have been launched for 
the following key areas — account management; supply 
chain; R&D and innovation; marketing; finance and strategy 
execution and business growth.

Malcolm Pye  
Chief Executive Officer 

Mark Plampin  
Chief Financial Officer 

Athene Blakeman  
Company Secretary  
and Group Legal Counsel

PLC   
EXECUTIVE 
BOARD

OPERATIONS 
BOARD

Jan-Emil Johannessen  
Head of Genetics

Date joined: 2014
 • Over 30 years’ experience in the salmon industry
 • Deep-rooted market insight into the food production sector
 • Strong management and commercial skills

Philippe Léger  
Head of Advanced Nutrition 

Date joined: 2015
 • 35 years’ experience in the aquaculture industry,  

worked with INVE since its foundation 

 • Strong local relationships with major producers:  
Europe, S E Asia, China, Latin America, USA 
 • Strong commercial skills with pioneering reputation

John Marshall  
Head of Animal Health 

Date joined: 2011
 • 20 years’ experience in the pharmaceutical industry,  
former Head of Global Technical Services and Head of  
European Business unit aquaculture at Novartis

 • Strong R&D, portfolio development and commercial skills 
 • Significant experience in taking new vaccines and products to market

James Banfield  
Head of Knowledge Services 

Date joined: 2012
 • 20 years’ experience in professional and education-publishing  

and business development

 • Strong international strategic skills and experience of B2B  

and B2C businesses

 • Experience of managing businesses across geographies:  

Europe, India, S E Asia, China, Australia, USA

Roland Bonney  
Group Lead, Key Account Management  
(Benchmark co-founder)

Date joined: 2000
 • Over 30 years’ experience in the food production sector 
 • Significant M&A experience in Europe, Asia & the Americas 
 • Strong strategy development and execution skills

Ivonne Cantu  
Director of Investor Relations  
and Corporate Development

Date joined: 2017
 • 20 years’ experience in corporate finance 
 • Significant experience of financing and capital raising 

 • M&A experience in international markets

Anna Winton  
Head of People

Date joined: 2002
 • Experience of managing HR departments in various  

businesses and regulatory environments

 • Several years experience of operating within international  

businesses with cultural diversity

 • Extensive knowledge of acquisition integration

67

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Strategic ReportSTRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONOUR PEOPLE

ONE  
BENCHMARK

Image: Benchmark specialists assess  
the prevalence of Amobic Gill Disease  
parasites at our lab in Norway.

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATI ON

‘

One Benchmark’

Diversity and equality

Our global team ranges from 
geneticists, nutritionists, livestock 
technicians, veterinarians through to 
auditors, accountants and sustainability 
officers. Harnessing this expertise 
across our global operations to drive 
efficiencies for our customers requires 
collaboration, communication and 
upholding robust ethical standards. 
Workshops were held throughout 
the year in the UK, Brazil, Thailand 
and USA as part of our on-boarding 
process for new employees. During the 
year a new internal communications 
platform was rolled out to ensure we 
remain connected across our different 
geographies. Work has also continued 
on the integration of people, systems 
and process across the Group to drive 
efficiency, increase effectiveness and 
provide a consistent external presence.

We strive to attract a diverse  
workforce and provide equal 
opportunities throughout the  
business. We aim to conduct our 
activities without discrimination  
and value everyone as an individual. 
Within the Group, there are some 
differences with regard to the benefits 
to which permanent and temporary 
employees are entitled, due to 
geographies and the number of hours 
worked. As a minimum, we comply 
with each country’s employment 
laws. Beyond this we aim to offer a 
competitive package of benefits that 
support and protect our people, are 
valued by our employees and are 
appropriate to our local markets. 

Gender pay 

The introduction of mandatory gender 
pay gap reporting in England, Scotland 
and Wales is a positive step for 
diversity and gender equality and will 
likely lead to increased transparency. 

Whilst Benchmark is not obliged to 
report on this issue, as we do not have 
250+ people employed at one site, 
we believe the potential benefits of 
reporting on gender pay will give us:
 • Greater understanding of where  

we need to take action

 • Access to a far wider reaching 

talent pool

 • A different way of thinking around 
diversity and inclusion more widely 
in the workplace

 • Reduced risk of equal pay claims 

and attrition.

We intend to report on the gender  
pay gap within the UK in April 2018. 
We will also review the gender pay 
gap within our overseas companies. 
This is an area that we take very 
seriously. More than 50 per cent of our 
employees are women and we continue 
to recruit women into senior roles.

VALUES

Our growth and continued success is down 
to the hard work, talent and dedication of 
every member of our team. Maintaining 
a culture where everyone feels a valued 
member of our global team, regardless of 
geography or role, is central to our strategy.

A series of global vision and values workshops continued 
throughout the year to ensure that all of our people feel 
empowered to ‘live’ the Benchmark values. 

Our global values define  
our culture as a business:

Brave & Ambitious
We challenge the status quo to create 
understanding, opportunity and innovation.

Focused 
We are clear on our vision and know  
what success looks like.

Practical 
We deliver the day job, we keep it simple, 
we are honest and straightforward.

Collaborative
None of us are as good as all of us.

Courteous & have Fun 
Our manners matter, our humour helps.

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Strategic Report

69

RECOGNITION

OFC & RASE Science & 
Innovation Award, UK

Reducing motorcycle fatalities 
and injuries, Thailand

Won in January 2017 by Benchmark 
Veterinary surgeon, Ruth Clements, 
in recognition of Benchmark's 5-Point 
Plan to tackle lameness.

Our factory in Phichit was the only  
non-government organisation to 
achieve 100 per cent compliance in 
this important government scheme. 

ECO Factory Award, Thailand

Our factory in Phicit scooped ‘ECO 
Factory Award’ at the ECO Innovation 
Forum for excellence in safety, 
sustainability and positive contribution 
to the local community.

London Stock Exchange’s 1000  
Companies to Inspire Britain

Benchmark was delighted to be included in the LSE’s 
2017 report alongside so many exciting UK companies.

BENCHMARK AWARDS

During the year, Benchmark launched a number of 
awards to recognise and drive excellence in aquaculture. 

Outstanding Health and Safety, Thailand

British Veterinary Association Chiron Award

For the second consecutive year, our advanced nutrition 
facility in Thailand received the provincial “Outstanding 
Occupational Health and Safety” award. 

Awarded to Benchmark co-founder and Director, Ruth Layton, 
for services to the international veterinary profession.

UK marine aquaculture awards

Three brand new categories were 
added to the Scottish Marine 
Aquaculture Awards, including 
‘Shellfish Farm Manager of the Year’, 
‘Rising Star Award’, and the ‘Peoples 
Choice Award’. 

Best Dissertation on 
Aquaculture and Fisheries

Master of Science in 
Aquaculture award

In partnership with Swansea 
University’s Centre for Sustainable 
Aquatic Research, awards were 
presented to Toby Champneys and 
Alice Wren for their dissertation on Nile 
tilapia, plaice and common sole.

Our inaugural Master of Science  
in Aquaculture was presented to  
MSc student, Bipul Kumar Dey, at  
the University of Ghent.

71

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Strategic ReportSTRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONFY17 FINANCIAL REVIEW

SOLID  
FINANCIAL  
PROGRESS

Good progress in  
trading results for 
Benchmark's two largest 
divisions secured 
financial progress for  
the Group despite some 
end market challenges 
and the decline in sales 
of mature products.

Mark Plampin 
Chief Financial Officer

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATI ON

Financial highlights
 • Revenue increased by 28% to £140.2m (2016: £109.4m) 
 • Like for like1 sales, including 12 month comparative figures 

for businesses acquired in 2016, increased by 13%

 • 47% growth in salmon genetics sales resulting  
from customer demand and the success of new  
products launched

 • Adjusted EBITDA increased by 9% to £10.0m  

(2016: £9.2m).

 • Loss for the year reduced by 61% to (£7.1m)  

(2016: (£18.3m))

 • £21.5m investment in state-of-the-art additional 

production capacity in health products and genetics

 • Like for like1 21% growth in nutrition products driven  

by increased market share and demand for higher margin 
live feed replacement and health diets

 • Net debt increased as expected, to £23.9m  

including £6.0m of ringfenced non-recourse debt  
used to part fund genetics capital expenditure

 • Sales of health products reduced by 39% due to lower 

demand for mature products

 • Total investment in R&D increased by £2.0m to £15.2m 
(of which £13.1m was expensed in the income statement 
and £2.1m was capitalised) but reduced as a percentage 
of sales to 11% (2016: 12%) reflecting reduced rate of 
increase in spend 

£m

Total revenue

Gross profit

Gross profit percentage

Research and development costs

Operating expenses

Adjusted EBITDA

Exceptional including acquisition related items

Loss before tax

Basic loss per share (pence) 

2017

2016

140.2 

109.4 

62.4 

45%

(13.1)

(39.3)

10.0 

5.6 

(8.1)

(1.4)

50.8 

46%

(11.7)

(29.9)

9.2 

(13.1)

(22.4)

(4.4)

We continue to use adjusted results as our primary measures of financial 
performance. In line with many of our peers in the sector we highlight 
expensed R&D on the face of the income statement separate from operating 
expenses. Furthermore, we report earnings before interest, tax, depreciation 
and amortisation (“EBITDA”) and EBITDA before including exceptional and 
acquisition related items (“Adjusted EBITDA”). We believe that this enables  
a better understanding of the investment we are making in the future growth  
of the Group and provides a better measure of our underlying performance. 
This is how the Board monitors the progress of the Group.

1  Like for like includes three months’ preacquisition results from unaudited INVE Aquaculture Group 
management information and unaudited eleven months proforma results for Genetica Spring SAS  
in the comparative period. See Financial Review Section page 74.

73

FINANCIAL REVIEW

Like for like

As an acquisitive group, we also make reference to “like-for-like” measures to adjust for the different periods 
of ownership of new acquisitions and to show the underlying performance of the group. For FY17, like for like 
includes three months’ preacquisition results from unaudited INVE Aquaculture Group management information 
and unaudited eleven months proforma results for Genetica Spring SAS in FY16 as shown in the tables below:

Like for like  
— Group

Revenue

2017 
£000

2016 
£000

140,172

109,375

Adjusted EBITDA2

10,039

9,228

Operating loss

(7,662)

(20,471)

Loss before taxation

(8,100)

(22,384)

11 months 
FY16 proforma 
Genetica Spring 
£000

3 months  
pre-acquisition 
INVE 
£000

Revised 
2016 
£000

60 

(970)

(1,147)

(1,147)

14,242 

123,677 

1,763 

10,021 

1,147 

(20,471)

1,148 

(22,383)

LFL 
£000

13%

0%

(63)%

(64)%

Like for like  
— Advanced Nutrition

2017 
£000

2016 
£000

3 months  
pre-acquisition 
INVE 
£000

Revenue

83,659

55,024

14,242

Adjusted EBITDA2

17,681

15,864

Operating profit/loss

1,082

4,481

1,453

837

Revised 2016 
£000

69,266

17,317

5,318

LFL 
£000

21%

2%

(80%)

Like for like  
— Genetics

Revenue

2017 
£000

2016 
£000

30,530 

20,717 

Adjusted EBITDA2

5,785 

1,385 

11 months 
FY16 proforma 
Genetica Spring 
£000

60 

(970)

Revised 2016 
£000

20,777 

LFL 
£000

47%

415 

1,294%

Operating profit/loss

9,460 

(3,648)

(1,147)

(4,795)

297%

2  Adjusted EBITDA — Earnings before tax, interest, depreciation and amortisation before 

exceptional including and acquisition related items. See Financial Review Section on page 73.

Revenue

Group revenue increased by 28% to £140.2m in the year 
(2016: £109.4m). The increase results from:
 • £28.6m from growth in our Advanced Nutrition business 
driven by increased market share and demand for higher 
margin live feed replacement and health diets plus the 
inclusion of a full year’s sales of the INVE business (vs 
nine months of trading post acquisition in 2016);
 • Strong growth in salmon genetics sales resulting  
from customer demand and the success of new  
products launched; 

 • Offset by reduced sales of health products  

due to lower demand for the now mature sea lice 
treatment Salmosan®. 

On a like for like basis sales increased by £16.5m  
(13%) and the Advanced Nutrition division delivered  
an increase of 14.2m (21%).

Group Revenue by Division

Animal Health
Knowledge Services*
Genetics
Advanced Nutrition

*Sustainability Science Division and Technical Publishing Division 

£140.2m

Adjusted EBITDA

Group Revenue

2017

2016

£109.4m

Group Revenue by Division

28.6

140.2

-0.5

109.4

9.8

2.6

-9.7

160

140

120

100

80

60

40

20

m
£

0

2 0 1 6 R evenue

K no wledge S ervices*
Anim al H ealth

Advanced N utrition
G enetics

2 0 1 7 R evenue
C orporate

*Sustainability Science Division and Technical Publishing Division 

Adjusted EBITDA increased by 9% to £10.0m (2016: £9.2m). 
On a like for like basis 2016 Adjusted EBITDA was £10.0m 

Benchmark Genetics delivered strong growth in Adjusted 
EBITDA with increased sales volumes and average sales 
prices for salmon eggs being the main drivers. The valuation 
of biological assets increased by £4.2m driven by the growth 
in sales in the year and strong order book at the year end. 
This supported strong growth in gross margins for the 
division and, after expensed R&D of £2.7m (2016: £2.2m), 
Adjusted EBITDA grew by 314% to £5.8m (2016: £1.4m).

Advanced Nutrition experienced lower growth rates in the 
first half year but key markets continued to recover through 
the second half. This recovery aided strong growth in higher 
margin live feed replacement and health diets. Market prices 
for some live feed products were impacted by significant 
oversupply in Asia and this resulted in reduced gross margin 
from this product category. An exceptional bad debt provision 
of £1.1m was made in the year for a single debtor related to 
sales made in 2016. After this provision and after expensed 
R&D of £3m (2016: £1.3m) the division reported Adjusted 
EBITDA of £17.7m (2016: £15.9m — nine months post 
acquisition). 2016 like for like Adjusted EBITDA was £17.3m.

Animal Health is in a phase of transition with a  
targeted increase in investment in new products that  
will deliver future organic growth set against a backdrop  
of reduced demand for existing mature products. Investment  
in expensed R&D reduced to £7.3m (2016: £8.3m) 
reflecting careful management of spend and the fact that  
an increasing proportion of R&D has to be capitalised as 
more pipeline products approach full launch. The division 
reported an increased Adjusted EBITDA loss of (£11.6m) 
(2016: loss of (£4.2m)). 

75

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Strategic ReportSTRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONKnowledge Services reported a reduced Adjusted EBITDA 
loss of (£0.9m) (2016: loss of (£1.4m)) as a result of 
increased R&D trials revenue and cost control.

Total Group operating costs (excluding expensed R&D) 
increased by 32% to £39.3m (2016: £29.9m). This increase 
reflects the impact of including a full year of INVE’s costs, a 
reduced credit from forex gains and a key driver of the balance 
was an increase in average headcount from 703 in 2016 to 
881 in 2017. Year end headcount was 952 (2016: 884).

Adjusted EBITDA bridge by Division

10.0

1.5

1.8

4.4

12.0

10.0

9.2

m
£

8.0

6.0

4.0

2.0

0.5

-7.4

0

K no wledge S ervices*
2 0 1 6 Adjusted E BIT D A
Anim al H ealth

Advanced N utrition
G enetics

C orporate

2 0 1 7 Adjusted E BIT D A

*Sustainability Science Division and Technical Publishing Division 

Adjusted EBITDA by Division

Investment in expensed R&D increased by £1.4m to £13.1m 
(2016: £11.7m). This represents a lower level of increase 
than in past years as R&D was carefully managed to 
ensure it is aligned with revenue growth and an increase in 
capitalised R&D as investment is more focused on products 
in the final stages of development. As a consequence  
R&D as a percentage of sales fell to 9% (2016: 11%).  
Total investment in R&D (including capitalized development 
costs) as a percentage of sales also fell to 11% (2016: 12%).

A net credit of £5.6m from exceptionals including acquisition 
related items is mainly due to the impact of the assessment 
of the likely level of payment of acquisition earnout 
liabilities and forex movements on those liabilities. In 2016, 
exceptional including acquisition related items were costs of 
£13.1m, principally due to the acquisition costs related to 
the purchase of INVE Aquaculture in December 2015.

As a result of the above, EBITDA was £15.7m for the year 
(2016: loss of £3.9m).

Headcount 2017

2017

2016

952

884

Investment in R&D 
(including capitalised development costs)

2017

2016

£15.2m

£13.2m

17.7

Net finance costs

20.0

15.0

10.0

5.0

0.0

-5.0

-10.0

m
£

5.8

-0.9

-0.9

-11.6

-15.0

Anim al H ealth

K no wledge S ervices*

Advanced N utrition
G enetics

C orporate

The Group incurred net finance costs of £0.5m during the 
year (2016: net finance costs of £2.2m). Interest charged 
on the Group’s revolving credit facility was £1.7m (2016: 
£0.9m) reflecting both a full year of interest in 2017 
(compared to nine months in the previous year) and a higher 
level of net debt during the year. The facility incurs interest 
in the range of 1.9% to 3.0% over LIBOR.

During the year, a foreign exchange gain of £1.2m arose due 
to the movement in exchange rates and has been included 
within finance costs (2016: £5.0m foreign exchange loss). 
In 2016, there was also an exchange gain of £3.7m on a 
foreign currency hedging instrument entered into to fix the 
US dollar consideration paid on the acquisition of INVE 
Aquaculture B.V.

*Sustainability Science Division and Technical Publishing Division 

Statutory loss before tax

Adjusted EBITDA

2017

2016

£10.0m

£9.2m

The loss before tax for the year at £8.1m is an improvement 
of £14.3m on the prior year (2016: loss of £22.4m). The 
impact of the improved trading outlined above was offset 
by higher depreciation and amortisation charges of £23.4m 
(2016: £16.6m) due to a full year of charge on the assets 
acquired in the prior year.

Taxation

Intangibles

There was a tax credit in the period of £1.0m (2016: credit 
£4.0m). The largest elements of this relate to overseas 
tax charges in the Genetics division of £1.7m and in the 
Advanced Nutrition division of £3.7m, offset by deferred tax 
credits of £5.6m, mainly on intangible assets arising on 
consolidation from recent acquisitions. No deferred tax assets 
have been provided on any losses made in the period.

Capitalised R&D increased by £0.7m to £2.1m. R&D costs 
related to products that are close to commercial launch 
have to be capitalised when they meet the requirements set 
out under IFRS. As Benchmark goes through a period of an 
increasing number of new products approaching launch this 
capitalisation will be an increasing feature in the mid-term.

Earnings per share

Basic loss and diluted loss per share were both 1.43p 
(2016: loss per share -4.39p). The movement year on year 
is due to a combination of the improved result for the year 
as noted above, and the higher average number of shares 
in 2017 due to a full year of the new shares issued in the 
equity raise used to fund the acquisition of INVE.

Basic EPS

0

-1

-2

-3

-4

e
c
n
e
P

-5

2.0

-1.4

0.9

-4.4

B asic EP S 2 0 1 6

Im pact of Increased
Im pact of Increased
N o. of S hares

B asic EP S 2 0 1 7
Earnings

Basic EPS from Adjusted EBITDA 

2.2

-0.4

0.1

1.9

2.5

2.0

1.5

1.0

0.5

e
c
n
e
P

0

Im pact of Increased
Im pact of Increased
EP S fro m Adjusted
N o. of S hares
E BIT D A 2 0 1 6

EP S fro m  Adjusted
E BIT D A 2 0 1 7
Earnings

Capital expenditure

Capital expenditure additions of £36.1m (2016: £18.7m)  
includes £20.5m cash investment on the ongoing construction 
of the new salmon egg production facility in Norway.

Cash flow

Net cash flow from operations was an increase of £13.4m 
(2016: outflow £10.5m) due to the improved EBITDA in 
the period, and the high acquisition costs incurred and a 
corresponding increase in working capital in the prior year.

Proceeds from increased borrowings of £5.9m were used  
to part fund some of the capital expenditure outlined above, 
with total cash outflow on tangible and intangible capital 
additions totalling £35.2m (2016: £20.2m).

Cash at the period end stood at £18.8m (2016: £38.1m) with 
net debt finishing the year at £23.9m (2016: net cash £0.4m).

Movement in Net Debt

16.4

0.4

m
£

20.0

15.0

10.0

5.0

0.0

-5.0

-10.0

-15.0

-20.0

-25.0

-30.0

0.9

-35.2

0.1

-4.6

-2.0

-23.9

Investm ents

N et cash FY 1 6

Interest and tax
C ash generated fro m operations
FX on cash borro wings
C apital expenditure

Other

N et debt FY 1 7

Dividends

No dividends have been paid or proposed in the year  
(2016: £nil) and the Board is not recommending a final 
dividend in respect of the year ended 30 September 2017.

Biological Assets

A feature of the Group’s net assets is its investment 
in biological assets, which under IAS 41 are stated at 
fair value. At 30 September 2017, the carrying value 
of biological assets was £16.5m (2016: £11.9m). The 
movement in the overall carrying value of biological assets  
is due principally to the increase in sales of and future 
orders for the Company’s salmon eggs.

Liquidity and net debt

The Group’s finance function is responsible for sourcing and 
structuring borrowing requirements. The Group had £42.7m in 
bank borrowings at the end of the year. Reported debt includes 
£6m in relation to the funding of the Group’s new salmon egg 
production facility in Norway. This is ringfenced debt without 
recourse to Benchmark. The key revolving credit facility has 
a maximum drawdown of £54m and a total of £38m had 
been drawn at the year end leaving sufficient headroom to 
meet normal funding requirements in the medium term. Net 
debt increased to £23.9m during the year as planned as 
available capital was invested in R&D and production capacity.

77

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Strategic ReportSTRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONRISK MANAGEMENT

Systems for risk management

Taking calculated risks is an important part of the Group’s 
business, and significant focus is given at Board level to the 
key risks affecting the business, including risk mitigation 
within the Group’s long-term strategy. The Board also 
discusses risks over which the Group has limited control, 
including biological and climatic factors which may affect the 
Group and its customers. 

During FY17, the Group continued to operate its established 
risk management framework, which is designed to make 
management of risk an integrated part of the organisation. 
The diagram visualises the Group’s framework for risk 
identification, assessment, and mitigation. This involves a 
bottom-up approach in which local management lead the 
identification, assessment and mitigation of risk, within the 
context of the Group’s framework for risk management and 
guidelines regarding risk appetite, with focus being placed 
on risks capable of having an effect at Group level. 

The implementation of the Group’s risk management 
framework is led by the Chief Financial Officer, with the 
support of external consultants, and the Board is ultimately 
responsible for oversight of the Group’s risk management 
systems, with the Audit Committee acting as a reviewing 
committee. During FY17, the Audit Committee received 
reports from the Chief Financial Officer regarding risk 
management, and from the Group’s auditors regarding 
financial and management controls. No major issues were 
identified, and the auditors’ recommendations in relation 
to certain non-material matters were implemented, with 
external advice being taken where appropriate.

Actions to mitigate risk were progressed; an overview 
of actions taken in respect of the more significant risks 
affecting the Group is set out in the diagram on the right. 

Risk appetite

The Group has determined not to make any amendments  
to its risk appetite statement, which is set out below:

Benchmark Holdings plc, operating as it does in a highly 
regulated sector involving significant interaction with living 
organisms, has a very low tolerance to risks of breaching 
legal, regulatory or ethical standards or anything which 
could negatively impact on our reputation. The nature of 
our business means that we can be impacted by biological 
or climatic effects which are beyond our influence and so, 
where possible, we take steps to mitigate these impacts on 
the business. We use our knowledge of fundamental biology 
to develop products that tackle unsolved problems often by 
applying new technology. We are mindful of our stakeholder 
requirements and so will take measured risk with regards to 
the integrity of our product pipeline and intellectual assets. 
We recognise that our people are one of our greatest assets 

and the Group encourages their long-term commitment 
allowing them to progress and achieve success. Failure to 
leverage value through collaborative working and cooperation 
between our divisions is not a risk we are prepared to accept 
and the Group has the management structure in place to 
continue to deliver this particular goal. Where we believe that 
actions will be beneficial to the Group and its stakeholders, 
such as specific projects or acquisitions, then we will be 
willing to take more risk commensurate with the potential 
rewards on offer.

This risk appetite statement is supported by guidelines for 
risk appetite in various areas, which have been reviewed and 
approved by the Board.

Bottom-up risk review

PLC risk register

Risks are identified in a bottom-up process 
involving local management, resulting in  
a risk register for each business. 

Risks capable of having  
an effect at Group level are 
identified and prioritised.

I

D
E
N
T
I
F
I

C
A
T
I

O
N

M
O
N

I
T
O
R

I

N
G

Ongoing monitoring and review

There is a continual process of updating 
risk registers, incorporating newly acquired 
businesses into the process, reviewing risk 
appetite, and monitoring the implementation 
of mitigation strategies. 

Risk weighting

Risks are assessed to give a gross risk 
weighting, taking into account likelihood of 
occurrence and severity of impact, and a net 
risk weighting, which also takes into account 
existing mitigating factors and controls. 

Risk exposure

The risk exposure (net risk weighting)  
is evaluated and it is determined whether 
the relevant risk is within the Company’s  
risk appetite.

A
S
S
E
S
S
M
E
N
T

A
N
D

E
V
A
L
U
A
T
I

O
N

M

I
T
I

G
A
T
I

O
N

Actions

Where risk exposure is outside risk appetite, 
actions are agreed and implemented, with 
priority given to risks capable of having an effect 
at Group level and risks outside risk tolerance. 

Risk appetite

The Company’s risk appetite, 
which varies depending on the 
type of risk, is determined. 

The risk tolerance limit, which 
allows for a level of deviation 
from risk appetite where 
warranted to achieve objectives, 
and risk capacity, which is the 
level of risk that the Group 
is able to handle, are also 
evaluated.

79

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Strategic ReportSTRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATION 
 
PRINCIPAL RISKS AND UNCERTAINTIES

Action to mitigate significant risks and uncertainties 

In our 2016 Annual Report, we set out the principal risks and uncertainties to which the Group is subject. During FY17, 
we focused on assessing the principal risks and uncertainties in more detail, and implementing actions and establishing 
systems to ensure appropriate mitigation of these. The areas of focus included:

Risk category

Risk and uncertainty

Mitigating factors

Licences and 
accreditations

Failure to obtain or retain licences for key 
existing or new products, R&D facilities or 
production sites could lead to reduced sales or 
restrictions on sales growth.

The Group sells products and services into over 70 countries globally, many of which are regulated. 
During FY17, we undertook a programme of reviewing existing product portfolios and pipeline products 
to evaluate regulatory compliance and anticipate shifts in policy and regulation. In response to this 
review, resource was added to the product regulation teams to handle an increasing number of new 
product launches, solutions identified for specific issues, and an improved system for linking the R&D, 
operational, regulatory, commercial and marketing aspects of new product development launched within 
the Advanced Nutrition division.

Products

The Group is reliant on the continued success 
of its research and development programmes 
for aquaculture and the commercial success of 
its pipeline products. An unexpectedly high new 
product development failure rate or delay in 
reaching market would delay revenue growth.

Our product pipeline continues to be carefully managed and prioritised to ensure an appropriate 
balance of risk of failure against investment for future growth. There are risks associated with product 
development and achievement of timeframes, which the Group seeks to mitigate through its project 
management systems. A new Chief Scientific Officer is being recruited to strengthen the Group’s R&D 
and innovation function and to ensure full exploitation of opportunities for cross divisional synergies  
in this space.

Development of resistance to some existing 
products would lead to reduced efficacy.

Supply chain and 
production

Delayed launch or under-utilisation of 
laboratory, manufacturing or R&D facilities 
resulting in reduced return on investment.

In anticipation of resistance to the Group’s first sea lice medicine Salmosan® developing in the 
field, the Company has over several years generated a next generation sea lice treatment. The new 
treatment is showing 100 per cent efficacy against sea lice in commercial field trials and has excellent 
environmental credentials, as all detectable traces of medicines are removed from the treatment water 
prior to it being discharged into the ocean. 

The Group has a strategy of mitigating supply chain risk in its growing vaccine portfolio by establishing 
in-house manufacturing, as there is limited external capacity in this sector, and in FY17 commenced 
first commercial scale production at its new Braintree Biotech Building. The new building is a state-
of-the-art EU GMP vaccine antigen manufacturing facility with the capability to support the technology 
platforms required by Benchmark’s vaccine portfolio, including recombinant constructs. The building 
completed its first commercial production and is in the final stages of qualification.

Utilisation of the Group’s in-house aquaculture R&D facilities has increased again in FY17; the new facilities 
at Ardtoe are now almost fully on line and while further optimisation is being completed there is 100 
per cent capacity scheduled FY18. The group’s dedicated warm water facility within FVG Thailand has 
increased capacity and biosecurity providing the group year round challenge facilities for shrimp and 
warm water fish species. The utilisation here is increased with 24 hour working and 100 per cent 
utilisation by Animal Health and Advanced Nutrition. Trials from these facilities have advanced several 
warm water products as well as Ectosan® in FY17 and are scheduled to accelerate more than half the 
pipeline in FY18.

Reliance on third parties to provide some raw 
materials and manufacturing services could 
lead to restrictions in supply.

A new cross divisional functional group has been established to review the Group’s supply chains  
(being the process from procurement through manufacturing to delivery to customer), with the aim  
of identifying opportunities for efficiency, operational improvements and synergies.

Disease outbreaks at sites with breeding 
programmes or live stocks could result in 
reduced revenues, reputational damage and 
potential product liability claims.

Financial

Limited diversity of revenue streams presents 
a risk of volatility in sales.

The Group is aware of the risk of disease outbreaks at sites with breeding programmes and live stocks 
and has implemented a number of initiatives to mitigate this risk. The Group’s Genetics division needs 
to grow its production capacity to meet market demand. Growth is planned having regard to the need 
to replicate broodstock to ensure that in case of complete or partial stock loss, the genetic value in 
the breeding programme is preserved. The new SalmoBreed Salten land based salmon facility in North 
Norway, which commenced construction at the start of FY17 and received its first stock in November 
2017, will hold the primary nucleus of the Group’s salmon breeding lines. Projected growth in the 
Group’s tilapia and shrimp production is being designed with these risks in mind, and will ensure 
that copies of breeding lines are held at multiple sites. In addition, the Group’s approach to insuring 
biological assets will be reviewed in FY18, to ensure that the policies taken remain appropriate for the 
Group’s growing portfolio of biological assets. 

As the Group has grown, its revenue streams have increasingly diversified and this has improved  
its ability to withstand individual market or product challenges. Benchmark now operates across  
the aquaculture supply chain in several species, both in cold and warm water. The Group’s strategy  
is targeted to exploit the growth opportunity in aquaculture and the focus on organic growth through 
launching new products into and expanding presence in existing markets will deliver further diversification. 

The group is exposed to risks associated with 
currency exchange rates. This impacts sales 
volumes where products are priced in US 
dollars but sold in local currency and impacts 
reported results when local results, assets and 
liabilities are converted to pounds sterling.

The Group’s reporting currency is pounds sterling. Where Group entities operate with a different 
functional currency, the Group’s policy is, where possible, to allow Group entities to settle liabilities 
denominated in their functional currency with the cash generated from their own operations in that 
currency. Where Group entities have liabilities denominated in a currency other than their functional 
currency (and have insufficient reserves of that currency to settle them), cash already denominated in 
that currency will, where possible, be transferred from elsewhere within the Group.

Debt facilities include financial covenants 
related to leverage and interest cover which, if 
breached, could lead to reclassification of debt 
as "within one year" and to the requirement to 
refinance on uncertain terms.

Where significant transactions are conducted in currencies other than the functional currencies of the 
individual entities, exposure to movements in exchange rate is mitigated by the use of simple financial 
derivative instruments as appropriate.

The Group maintains short and long-term cash flow projections to ensure sufficient liquidity is available 
to meet foreseeable requirements. 

The Group’s budgeting and forecasting process includes focus on financial covenants to ensure 
adequate headroom is maintained. Since inception of the facility strong relationships have been 
maintained with the Group’s bankers. During 2017 regular meetings were held with the banks to 
keep them briefed on developments in the business. There is a productive and proactive relationship 
between the Group and its bankers.

Risk category

Risk and uncertainty

Mitigating factors

People

Failure to recruit, retain or replace employees 
with skills key to the success of the business.

Our ability to recruit and retain highly skilled people continues to be of high strategic importance. We 
take a multi-channel approach to recruitment, involving trusted recruitment partners, direct advertising 
and use of our own networks as appropriate to the role and local market. A key project commencing in 
early 2018 is to develop a systematic process for succession planning across the Group. This is one 
element of our approach to retaining critical knowledge, skills and experience within the Group and will 
help us develop our teams and mitigate any loss of key employees.

Benchmark is involved in production 
environments and there is a risk of injury or 
death to employees. This could lead to legal 
action and, as a consequence, reputational and 
financial damage to the group.

A strong safety representative structure has been established and every employee signed up to the 
Benchmark commitment to health and safety. Throughout the year communication channels have been 
established to give employees globally the opportunity to engage with health and safety, report concerns 
and share best practice. The year culminated with Benchmark’s first Global Safety Day, where managers 
and their teams explored health and safety in their workplace and generated improvement action plans.

Intellectual 
property

Risk of legal challenge to the Group's 
intellectual property leading to potentially 
significant costs being incurred in the defence 
of Group IP or defending against third party 
accusations that the group breached third party 
IP. A failed defence could lead to the loss  
of a product and/or compensatory awards.

Access to rights to commercialise some 
pipeline products developed in collaboration 
with universities or other third parties are 
yet to be negotiated and there is a risk 
that the Group may not be able to launch 
these products or may have to agree to less 
favourable terms in order to do so.

Intellectual property rights are fundamental to supporting the technologies, services and products 
the Group delivers to the industry, and to its success. The Group’s IP strategy focuses on ensuring 
that we have freedom to operate in the areas the business requires, that we capture and protect IP 
including through patenting and in-licensing, that we appropriately utilise IP by developing knowledge 
and promoting value realisation, and that we build and protect brand equity by securing and enforcing 
our trademarks. In FY17, the Group increased its campaign of prosecuting competitors which 
infringe its patents, some of which actions are settled by entering into licensing arrangements to 
ensure we capture value from these assets. We also invested by strategically enlarging the Group’s 
patent portfolio by over 25 per cent, primarily through filing new patent applications, focused on new 
aquaculture vaccines, pharmaceuticals, diagnostics and supporting technologies.

Assets and 
business 
interruption

Damage to Group assets could result in loss of 
key breeding or manufacturing capacity coupled 
with long lasting consequential losses including 
loss of customers.

Fire risk assessments have been completed at key sites. Actions taken to reduce the identified risks 
include improvements in fire prevention and emergency response capabilities. The Group HSE Manager 
has performed audits at the majority of the Group production facilities. Policy changes have been 
made to ensure the potential for, or incidents of, damage to assets is an integral element of reporting 
procedures and health and safety initiatives.

Key systems or IT Infrastructure failure could 
lead to temporary or permanent loss of data 
resulting in lost IP, delays to product launches, 
reduced production capacity, delays to financial 
reporting, etc.

Benchmark employs a centralised IT team with an IT strategy in place that has security at its centre. 
This includes implementation of key security systems like single sign on. The group utilises a mix of in 
house and outsourced solutions to ensure systems are robust and data is secure.

Reputational

Failure of a Group product could cause third 
party loss or damage resulting in potential 
legal action, loss of confidence in product, 
damaged reputation and reduced sales. There 
is risk of one entity suffering reputational 
damage that then spreads to other associated 
Group companies.

As the Group’s portfolio of products and services grows, and opportunities for cross selling between 
divisions are implemented, the Group’s exposure to reputational risk associated with failure of products 
also increases. The Group has a strong Operational Board, close relationships between its divisional 
heads, and for key customers systems for communication at all levels of the organization through its 
Key Account Management programme. This structure ensures good communication and coordinated 
management of customers, allowing for better management of these relationships, both as regards 
risks and optimisation of opportunities.

Synergies

One of the Group's key strategies is to  
extract synergies between operating divisions 
and failure to manage this effectively could 
inhibit growth.

Brexit

The Board continues to monitor and assess 
the impact of the UK’s decision to leave the 
European Union. Whilst the decision to leave 
the EU will affect UK trade agreements and 
relevant European legislation, we do not 
anticipate changes to our business model in 
the near to medium term.

The Group has reviewed and implemented changes to its management structure in order to optimise 
the identification and exploitation of cross divisional synergies. Details of the new structure are set 
out in the leadership section of this Annual Report on pages 84 to 86. The streamlined Operational 
Board is focused on optimising cross-divisional synergies; functional groups have been established to 
optimise synergies across R&D and innovation, supply chain and operations, key account management 
and marketing; key revenue streams for FY18 are reported on regularly to ensure focus on delivery;  
and a Strategy Execution and Business Growth team has been established to assist the business  
in delivering its strategic goals.

Benchmark’s current view on the possible impact is:
 • Trading — Most of Group’s operations and sales do not involve EU countries, so the impact on 

trading of the result of the referendum are expected to be limited. 

 •  Exchange rate volatility — A large proportion of the Group’s sales are transacted in US dollars and 
volatile GBP exchange rates may lead to increased exchange gains or losses. However, these are, 
to an extent, naturally hedged by raw materials sourced in US dollars and by Benchmark’s US dollar 
denominated borrowing facility.

 •  Regulatory environment — Changes to regulation, including product registration, will be an area of 
focus as the new trading environment becomes clear. Our international footprint gives the Group 
flexibility to mitigate the effects of any potential material changes.

 • Workforce mobility — Our ability to employ specialist professionals may be affected by changes 
to immigration and employment rules. We will monitor developments in this area to ensure we 
maintain an effective system for planning people resources.

The Strategic Report was approved by the Board on 23 January 2018 and signed on its behalf by 

Malcolm Pye
Chief Executive Officer

81

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Strategic ReportSTRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATION02

GOVERNANCE

84 

Introduction to the Board

86 

 Leadership

90  Effectiveness

93  Accountability

97  Remuneration

102  Shareholders

102  Directors’ Report

106   Directors’ Responsibility Statement

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCI AL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATI ON

While working in the highlands as a 
vet I became increasingly interested in 
aquaculture. After finishing my Masters 
in Aquatic Vet Studies, I moved back, 
joined Benchmark’s Fish Vet Group and 
I haven’t looked back.

Chris Matthews  
Fish Vet Group  
Operations Director  
Inverness 

83

BOARD OF DIRECTORS

DIVERSE 
LEADERSHIP

Malcolm Pye  
Chief Executive Officer

Appointed: November 2000

Independent: No

The depth of knowledge, broad scientific skills 
and commercial experience of our directors 
ensure we recognise and extract the synergies 
we need to succeed.

Skills, competence and experience: Malcolm has over 30 years’ experience in international 
Agribusiness through his roles within the Hillsdown Holdings/HMTF group, operating in animal 
breeding, poultry, feed milling and veterinary services. During this time, Malcolm gained extensive 
experience in breeding and genetics, sales and strategic M&A, and held board positions within 
the Group. Malcolm co-founded Benchmark in 2000 and has since led the Company’s growth and 
diversification. Malcolm has a degree in Zoology/Applied Zoology from the University of Wales (Bangor).

Mark Plampin  
Chief Financial Officer

Appointed: March 2010

Independent: No

Skills, competence and experience: Mark is a qualified Chartered Certified Accountant with over 20 
years’ experience. Mark joined Benchmark in 2010 from PKF (UK) LLP (now BDO LLP), where he was 
a Partner and National Chairman of the Food Sector Group. Mark’s experience at PKF was focussed 
on corporate finance, including leading on M&A and the strategic development of high-growth small 
and mid-market businesses.

Alex Hambro  
Chairman

Nomination Committee (Chair) — Audit Committee

Appointed: December 2013

Independent: Yes

Skills, competence and experience: Alex has operated in the private equity industry, both in the  
UK and USA, for over 25 years. He has acted as principal investor, manager and sponsor of private 
equity and venture capital management teams, and adviser to professional private clients. Alex 
managed the venture capital and private equity fund investment portfolio for Hambros plc, prior to 
its sale to Société Générale in 1998. Alex was also a founding Director of both Crescent Capital, 
a venture capital fund management team based in Belfast, and Judges Scientific plc, a scientific 
instrument manufacturing group.

Other roles: Chair of Judges Scientific plc; Chair of Crescent Capital NI Limited; Non-executive 
Director of Octopus Apollo VCT plc; Non-executive Director of BACIT (UK) Ltd; Non-executive Director 
Bapco Closures; Non-executive Director Whitley Asset Management; Non-executive Director First 
Magazine Ltd.

Yngve Myhre  
Non-executive Director

Appointed: November 2017

Independent: Yes

Skills, competence and experience: Yngve has more than 20 years’ experience in the aquaculture 
sector as a senior executive, adviser and investor. Yngve was Chief Executive of leading Norwegian 
salmon producer SalMar, and of international white fish supplier Aker Seafood during periods of 
successful growth. Yngve has a very strong track record in Benchmark’s focus area of aquaculture, 
both in the Norwegian and international markets.

Other roles: Yngve is Chairman of Chilean salmon producer Nova Austral, and sits on the boards  
of Mediterranean fish producer, Andromeda, and Norwegian aquaculture research institute, Nofima. 
Yngve also acts as a strategic adviser to investors in the aquaculture sector.

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCI AL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATI ON

Kevin Quinn  
Non-executive Director

Audit Committee (Chair) — Remuneration Committee

Appointed: November 2016

Independent: Yes

Skills, competence and experience: Kevin is a qualified Chartered Accountant with over 30 years' 
financial experience in international business and the biosciences industry, including with FTSE 100 
companies. Kevin was Chief Financial Officer at Berendsen plc, the leading FTSE 250 European textile 
service business, until the takeover of Berendsen by Elis SA in September 2017. Previously, Kevin 
held senior finance positions within biosciences group Amersham plc and before that was a partner 
with PricewaterhouseCoopers (Prague). Kevin holds a BA in French from University College, Durham.

Hugo Wahnish  
Non-executive Director 

Appointed: November 2017

Independent: Yes

Skills, competence and experience: Hugo has over 35 years’ experience in the animal health and 
pharmaceuticals industry, firstly with GlaxoSmithKline, and more recently with Merck during a major 
growth period. Hugo was Chief Commercial Officer Animal Health at Merck, with responsibility for 
Merck’s commercial operations worldwide. Hugo brings a wealth of international experience to 
the board of Benchmark, alongside his expertise in aggressively growing businesses and in the 
commercialisation of medicines and animal health products.

Other roles: Hugo has acted as an independent senior advisor with several multinational companies, 
private equity groups and consulting firms, primarily in the animal health sector.

Susan Searle  
Senior Independent 
Director

Remuneration Committee (Chair) — Nomination Committee

Appointed: December 2013

Independent: Yes

Skills, competence and experience: Susan has over 25 years’ experience working with entrepreneurs 
and academic inventors in the commercialisation of university research. Susan co-founded Imperial 
Innovations Group plc (now owned by IP Group), one of the world’s leading technology venture 
investment businesses, and was the group’s Chief Executive Officer from 2002 to 2013. Previously, 
Susan held roles in sales, marketing, operations and manufacturing in various industries including 
chemicals, precious metals and retail. She has investment and M&A experience in healthcare and 
technology companies. Susan holds an MA in Chemistry from Exeter College, Oxford.

Other roles: Chair of Woodford Patient Capital PLC; Chair of Mercia Technologies PLC; Senior 
Independent Director and Non-executive Director of Horizon Discovery Group plc; Non-executive 
Director of QinetiQ Group plc.

Appointed: September 2014

Independent: No

Skills, competence and experience: Athene is a qualified Solicitor with over 13 years’ experience. 
Having previously worked in Slaughter and May and Travers Smith’s corporate finance teams, Athene 
joined Benchmark in 2014. Athene is responsible for the Group’s legal and intellectual property 
functions globally, including compliance, M&A and joint ventures, share schemes, commercial and 
other contracts, capture and utilisation of IP, disputes, and management of legal risk. Athene holds 
an MA in Jurisprudence from St John’s College, Oxford.

Athene Blakeman 
Company Secretary and 
Group Legal Counsel

Board Committees

Audit Committee
Kevin Quinn (Chair) 
Alex Hambro

Nomination Committee
Alex Hambro (Chair) 
Susan Searle

Remuneration Committee
Susan Searle (Chair) 
Kevin Quinn

In July 2017, Roland Bonney, formerly Chief Operating Officer, stepped down from the Board for medical reasons. In light of 
the Group’s strong focus on aquaculture, the significance of its pipeline of products and technologies, and its rapid geographic 
expansion, the Nomination Committee determined to further strengthen the Board with Non-Executive Directors having dedicated 
aquaculture, pharmaceutical and international industry expertise. Hugo Wahnish, who has a strong track record in international 
pharmaceuticals, and Yngve Myhre, who has extensive expertise in aquaculture in Norway, Chile and the Mediterranean, were 
both appointed to the Board shortly after the year end (November 2017). The Company intends to appoint a Chief Scientific 
Officer to the Board during 2018. 

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Governance

85

LEADERSHIP

Governance framework

Benchmark’s governance framework is outlined in the diagram below and described in this report. 

The Company complies with the principles of the UK Corporate Governance Code (the Code). An overview  
of the Company’s compliance with the Code is set out in the Directors’ Report on pages 102 to 105. 

Board of Directors of Benchmark Holdings plc

Chair, Non-Executive Director

Alex Hambro

Senior Independent Non-Executive Director Susan Searle

Non-Executive Directors

Chief Executive Officer

Chief Financial Officer

Company Secretary

Kevin Quinn
Hugo Wahnish
Yngve Myhre

Malcolm Pye

Mark Plampin

Athene Blakeman

Audit Committee

Nomination Committee

Remuneration Committee

Kevin Quinn (C)
Alex Hambro

Alex Hambro (C)
Susan Searle

Susan Searle (C)
Kevin Quinn

Operations Board

Chief Executive Officer

Chief Financial Officer

Heads of Division
 • Advanced Nutrition
 • Genetics
 • Animal Health
 • Knowledge Services
Heads of cross-Group functions
 • Key Account Management
 • Group Legal Counsel
 • Investor Relations
 • Head of People

Malcolm Pye

Mark Plampin

Philippe Leger
Jan-Emil Johannessen
John Marshall
James Banfield

Roland Bonney
Athene Blakeman
Ivonne Cantu
Anna Winton

Advanced Nutrition Board

Genetics Board

Animal Health Board

Knowledge Services Board

Executive Directors

Executive Directors

Executive Directors

Executive Directors

Head of Division

Head of Division

Head of Division

Head of Division

Senior management of 
businesses in division

Senior management of 
businesses in division

Senior management of 
businesses in division 

Senior management of 
businesses in division

The Group is currently in the process of recruiting  
a Chief Scientific Officer, who will join the Board  
of Directors of the Company.

The roles of the Board of Directors of Benchmark  
Holdings plc, the Operations Board, and the Divisional 
Boards are as follows.

Board of Directors of Benchmark Holdings plc

Responsible for the long-term success of the Group, 
overseeing the development and delivery of strategy, 
financial performance, and conduct of the business,  
in order to generate sustainable value for shareholders. 

The Executive Directors are responsible for the delivery 
of strategy, business operations, risk management, and 
ensuring that the right financial and people resources are 
in place to achieve the Company’s aims. The Non-Executive 
Directors are responsible for assisting in the development 
of and constructively challenging strategy, overseeing the 
performance of management, satisfying themselves that 
financial controls and risk management systems are robust, 
and safeguarding the integrity of financial information, 
determining the Directors’ remuneration, and succession 
planning for the Executive Directors and senior management. 

A formal schedule of matters reserved for the Board is 
maintained and communicated throughout the Group 
with regular training, to ensure that decisions which are 
significant due to their strategic, financial or reputational 
implications are reserved for approval by the Board. The 
column to the right lists the key areas of decision-making 
reserved for the Board.

Operations Board

Responsible for developing and delivering cross-Group 
opportunities, revenue and costs synergies, advancing 
integration, and overseeing the financial and operational 
performance of the Group as a whole.

Divisional Boards — Advanced Nutrition; Genetics; Animal 
Health; Knowledge Services

Responsible for the development and delivery of the  
strategy of the relevant division and its businesses,  
its financial performance, and the implementation of  
cross-Group opportunities and synergies.

Matters reserved for the Board 

Strategic decisions 
 • Review and approval of the long-term objectives  

and strategic direction of the Group 

 • Approval and monitoring of strategic and annual  

business plans and budget

 • Approval of significant acquisitions, mergers,  

disposals and other transactions

 • Approval of diversification into new business  

activities and new geographies

Reporting
 • Approval of the Annual Report and Accounts  
and of the interim financial statements

 • Oversight and approval of significant changes  

to reporting policies and practices

Regulatory matters 
 • Compliance with the AIM Rules for Companies,  
principles of the UK Corporate Governance Code, 
procedures for regulating dealing in the Company’s 
shares by its employees and Directors 

Finance, governance and controls
 • Review and approval of internal control and risk 

management systems 

 • Approval of significant projects, contracts and disputes 
 • Approval of financing policy including the issue of shares 

and significant borrowings 

 • Appointment or removal of the auditors and determination 

of the audit fee 

 • Oversight and approval of Directors’ conflicts of interests 
 • Approval of interim dividends and recommendation  

of final dividends 

Succession planning and reward 
 • Ensuring adequate succession planning is in place 
 • Appointment and removal of Directors on the Board  
and its Committees, and of the Company Secretary 
 • Approving and recommending to shareholders the terms 
of employee share schemes, and approving significant 
changes to pension schemes 

 • Approval of remuneration of senior management

87

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | GovernanceSTRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONBoard attendance

During the year, the Board held 10 scheduled Board meetings and 8 special Board meetings. Individual attendance  
at the scheduled Board meetings is set out below.

A Board dinner is usually held around Board meetings to allow for more informal discussion, and for the Board  
to spend time with the Company’s senior management team. 

Around scheduled Board meetings, the Board visited the Group’s Advanced Nutrition and Animal Health  
manufacturing, diagnostics and trials facilities in Thailand; the Advanced Nutrition headquarters and R&D  
facilities in Belgium; Knowledge Services research farm in Oxford; and headquarters in Sheffield.

Attendance

Alex Hambro, Chair

Susan Searle,  
Senior Independent Director

Kevin Quinn

Non-Executive Director

Malcolm Pye,  
Chief Executive Officer

Mark Plampin,  
Chief Financial Officer

Roland Bonney1 
Chief Operating Officer

Appointment

Number of scheduled Board 
meetings attended in FY17

Maximum possible scheduled 
meetings in FY17

% of scheduled meetings 
attended

December 2013

December 2013

November 2016

December 2013

December 2013

December 2013

10

10

7

10

10

6

10

10

8

10

10

9

100%

100%

88%

100%

100%

66%

1 Roland Bonney stepped down from the Board in July 2017, and was unable to attend certain Board meetings prior to that date, for medical reasons.

Board activities in the year

At each scheduled Board meeting, the following standing items are considered:

Standing agenda items
 • Notice, quorum, Directors’ duties and any conflicts  

of interest arising.

 • Approval of minutes and review action points from 

previous meetings. 

 • Review of Management Information Pack which includes 
Group management accounts, outlook, cash flow forecast, 
financial covenant forecast, share price performance, 
shareholder and trading report and headcount report. 

 • Receipt of update from the CEO regarding strategic 

matters and significant developments. 

 • Review of Capex Project Report, tracking expenditure 
and progress with significant capital investments. In 
FY17 these reports included the SalmoBreed Salten 
land based salmon broodstock facility; the Braintree 
Biotech vaccine manufacturing facility; Ardtoe aquaculture 
research facility; expansion of the Group’s lumpfish 
production facilities; and construction of the Genetics 
division’s salmon smolt facility. 

 • Review of Deal Tracker, updating on  

potential acquisitions, joint ventures and  
other exceptional transactions.

 • Consideration and approval of Matters  

Reserved for the Board. 

 • Review of Compliance Report, regarding  

compliance matters, training and initiatives. 
 • Review of People Report, with an overview of  

headcount, vacancies, management appointments,  
and updating on other people matters arising. 

 • Review of Health and Safety Report, with an overview 
of accident and near miss reporting, initiatives, risk 
assessments, and Health and Safety performance. 
 • Review of Investor Relations Report, summarising 
announcements, media coverage and other  
shareholder events. 

In addition to the standing items, an overview of the 
principal matters considered by the Board in the year  
is set out below:

 • Received report from the Chair of the Audit Committee  

on the FY16 audit process and principal matters discussed 
with the auditors. 

 • Reviewed the Group’s risk management framework  
and risk register and received update on ongoing  
process for mitigation of key risks. 

 • Reviewed and approved the implementation  

of the Group’s policy in relation to international  
economic sanctions. 

 • Received advice from the Group’s auditors regarding  

the level of D&O insurance.

 • Reviewed and approved the Group’s tax strategy,  

and received report on a review of the Group’s transfer 
pricing policy. 

 • Received updates on key regulatory developments, 
including the new Market Abuse Regulation and  
corporate tax offences, and discussed the Group’s  
plans for compliance. 

 • Received updates on disputes and litigation, including 

actions taken to protect the Group’s intellectual property. 

 • Received presentation on health and safety from the 

Group Health and Safety Manager, including near miss 
and incident reporting, approach to health and safety, 
higher risk areas, and mitigating action. 

 • Received presentation regarding talent management  

from the Head of People.

Shareholders
 • Approved the Annual Report and Accounts and  

Interim Results. 

 • Oversaw the planning and execution of the Company’s 

Capital Markets Day for investors, and other engagement 
with institutional investors.

 • Received reports following meetings with major 

shareholders involving the Chairman of the Board  
and Senior Independent Director, throughout the year.

Research and development
 • Received presentations from the Heads of R&D of the 
Advanced Nutrition division and Animal Health division 
on the product pipeline, discussing R&D expenditure, 
the portfolio’s strategic focuses, late stage and major 
products, timelines to launch, risks, and opportunities. 
 • Received reports on the Advanced Nutrition, Genetics  
and Animal Health product pipelines on a quarterly  
basis, providing an overview of the portfolio and  
updates on progress.

Strategy and operations
 • Received and discussed presentations from the  

heads of each of the Advanced Nutrition, Genetics,  
Animal Health and Knowledge Services divisions,  
covering 3 year strategic plans, synergies, investments, 
growth opportunities and key risks. 

 • Reviewed and approved the Group budget for FY17. 
 • Received reports on and discussed synergies and  
cross-group opportunities, across R&D, production,  
cross-selling and Key Account Management. 
 • Reviewed and approved changes to the Group’s 

management structure to ensure that the Company  
has the people and structure required for the next  
phase of growth and integration. 

 • Received updates from the Head of IP Commercialisation 
regarding the Group’s intellectual property strategy and 
discussed the capture and utilisation of IP within the 
business, key IP assets and risks. 

 • Received regular updates on progress with the 

development of ground-breaking sea lice treatment  
and CleanTreat® system. 

 • Discussed the Group’s strategy for growth in the  
Genetics division, including in shrimp and tilapia,  
and related opportunities. 

 • Oversaw the process, and approved the renewal, of  

the Sales and Marketing Agreements with the Great Salt 
Lake Cooperative. Received regular updates on the Great 
Salt Lake artemia harvest and the Advanced Nutrition 
division’s artemia procurement strategy. 

 • Received updates on and discussed the Group’s  
strategy in relation to China and related proposals. 
 • Reviewed utilisation plan for Benchmark Vaccines 
including the new Braintree Biotechnology vaccine 
manufacturing facility. 

 • Discussed strategy in relation to FVG Asia, including 

movement of the aquaculture diagnostics laboratory in 
Thailand to reduce overheads and bring all the Group’s 
Asian trials and diagnostics facilities together in the 
same region. 

 • Approved the grant of share options pursuant to the 

Group’s bonus schemes, under which 60.66 per cent  
of employees hold options in the Company. 

Governance and risk
 • Oversaw and approved the appointment of  

Non-Executive Director and Chair of the Audit  
Committee, Kevin Quinn. Oversaw the process  
of recruiting two new Non-Executive Directors  
with international pharmaceutical and aquaculture  
expertise, resulting in the appointment of Hugo  
Wahnish and Yngve Myhre shortly after the year  
end. Approved the reappointment of Non-Executive 
Directors Alex Hambro and Susan Searle for  
a further three year term. 

89

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | GovernanceSTRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONEFFECTIVENESS

Nomination Committee Report

The Nomination Committee is responsible for safeguarding 
the effectiveness of the Board by regularly reviewing its 
composition, and leading a rigorous and transparent process 
for the identification and appointment of new Directors.

The Nomination Committee comprises:

Alex Hambro (Chair) 
Susan Searle

Only the members of the Nomination Committee have the 
right to attend meetings. The Head of People, other Board 
members and external advisers may be invited to contribute 
on specified agenda items. The Company Secretary acts as 
a secretary to the Nomination Committee. The Nomination 
Committee regularly updates, and invites contributions from, 
the Board. 

Attendance

Appointment

Alex Hambro 
Chair

Susan 
Searle

December 
2013

December 
2013

Number of 
scheduled 
Board 
meetings in 
FY17 

Maximum 
possible 
scheduled 
meetings in 
FY17

% of 
scheduled 
meetings 
attended

2

2

2

2

100%

100%

In addition to the Nomination Committee meetings,  
several informal meetings and calls were held during the 
year between the members of the Nomination Committee 
and other members of the Board, regarding the recruitment 
and appointment of new Non-Executive Directors.

Responsibilities

During the year the main responsibilities were:
 • To review the composition of the Board, including its size, 
balance of skills, knowledge, experience and diversity

 • To lead the process for Board appointments and 
recommend the appointment of new Directors

 • To review the re-appointment of Non-Executive Directors
 • To make recommendations on the composition  

of the Board Committees

 • To consider succession for Board members and  

senior management

The Nomination Committee’s terms of reference are 
reviewed annually and a summary of these is available  
on the Corporate Governance section of our website  
at benchmarkplc.com.

Actions undertaken during the year

Following a review of the Board composition in FY16,  
the focus of the Nomination Committee in FY17 was  
on broadening the experience represented on the Board,  
in light of the Group’s growth, the diversification of its 
business and increased presence in global markets.  
It was recognised that the Board would benefit from 
increased diversity and dedicated aquaculture, 
pharmaceutical and international industry expertise. 

At the start of the year, the Committee finalised the 
appointment of Kevin Quinn as Non-Executive Director,  
Chair of the Audit Committee and member of the 
Remuneration Committee, following the retirement  
of Basil Brookes for health reasons. 

The Nomination Committee then initiated a process of 
recruiting two new Non-Executive Directors, appointing the 
Zygos Partnership to assist. The Zygos Partnership are 
signatories to the Voluntary Code of Conduct for Executive 
Search Firms in Board Appointments which is designed 
to address gender and wider diversity on boards. The 
Company set certain requirements for diversity on long 
lists of candidates, relating to gender and nationality, which 
were met. The Zygos Partnership has no other connections 
with the Company. Throughout the process, the Nomination 
Committee consulted with and involved the Board. Shortly 
after year end, we were pleased to appoint Hugo Wahnish, 
who is based in the US and has over 30 years of experience 
in the international animal health and pharmaceuticals 
industry, and Yngve Myhre, who is based in Norway and 
has over 20 years of experience in the international 
aquaculture sector, to the Board. The Nomination Committee 
is coordinating and overseeing the induction of the new 
Directors, including meetings with senior management  
and site visits during the coming year. 

Roland Bonney, formerly Chief Operating Officer, experienced 
ill health during the year and stepped down from the Board 
in July 2017. The Nomination Committee monitored the 
situation and exercised oversight over the allocation of 
his duties to other members of the executive and senior 
management team. In FY17, the Company undertook a 
review of its management structure to prepare the Group  
for the next phase of its development, and the duties 
formerly held by the COO were considered as part of this 
process. Roland Bonney has now returned to the business 
to lead the Key Account Management initiative. 

The Nomination Committee and the Board discussed  
and received regular updates regarding the implementation 
of the new management structure. The changes were 
designed to clarify the responsibilities of the operational 
boards for the development and delivery of strategy, drive 
efficiencies in the supply chain, streamline R&D and 
innovations activities, drive further integration with a focus 
on the way the Group interacts with its customers, and 
improve internal and external communications. The review 
resulted in a leaner Operational Board, with some key 
hires focused on strengthening the Group’s commercial 
operations. Businesses within the divisions have been 
further integrated, with each divisional Board responsible 
for development and delivery both of strategy in the division 
and of relevant synergies and cross-divisional opportunities. 
A number of new cross-Group functions were established to 
cement strong relationships and coordinated action between 
divisions, including Key Account Management; Supply Chain; 
Chief Scientific Officer; Marketing Director; and a Strategy 
Execution and Business Growth Team. The new structure is 
designed to support the delivery of the Group’s strategy, on 
the basis of the platform that Benchmark has now built, in 
order to drive value for shareholders.

Actions for the coming year

In the coming year, the focus of the Nomination  
Committee will be working with the Remuneration 
Committee to oversee the establishment of a strategy for 
and systematic approach to succession planning across 
the business, including at Board level. We will continue 
to assess the Group’s performance at management level 
against diversity metrics, and support the business with 
initiatives to drive improvement in this area. The Nomination 
Committee plans to undertake a review of the effectiveness 
of the Board, a process which was last undertaken in 2015. 
It will keep the composition of the Board under review to 
ensure that the size, balance of skills, knowledge and 
experience remains suitable for the needs of the Company.

Board composition

The Board comprises seven Directors, a Non-Executive 
Chairman; Senior Independent Director; three further  
Non-Executive Directors; and two Executive Directors,  
the Chief Executive Officer and the Chief Financial Officer. 

The size and composition of the Board was reviewed  
during the year by the Nomination Committee and by the 
Board, and it was determined that in light of the Group’s 
growth, the diversification of its business and increased 
presence in global markets, it would be beneficial to 
bring additional expertise to the Board. The report of the 
Nomination Committee discusses the process of recruitment 
and other changes to the Board during the course of the 
year, which ultimately resulted in the appointment of two  
new Non-Executive Directors shortly after year end. 

The Board considers that the composition of the  
Board remains suitable for the Group, and contains an 
appropriate breadth and balance of skills, knowledge, 
experience and independence. 

Directors’ roles and responsibilities

Biographical details for all members of the Board  
can be found on pages 84 to 85 of this report.

There is a clear separation between the roles  
of Chairman and Chief Executive Officer.

Chairman

Chief Executive Officer

Lead the Board to ensure effective 
functioning in all aspects of its role

Oversee operation of the day-to-day 
business of the Group

Lead the development and delivery 
of strategy and budget, to enable 
the Group to meet the requirements 
of its shareholders

Lead and oversee the executive 
management of the Group

Establish an environment  
which allows the recruitment, 
engagement, retention and 
development of the people needed  
to deliver the Group’s strategy

Promote an open culture of debate

Ensure that the membership of the 
Board is appropriate for the needs 
of the business

Oversee Board committees  
as they carry out their duties, 
including reporting to the Board

Set and manage the agenda  
for Board meetings

Ensure the provision of information 
necessary for Directors to take  
a full and constructive part in  
Board discussions

Develop and maintain effective 
communications with shareholders

Establish appropriate  
personal objectives for the  
Chief Executive Officer

Ensure the Directors are up to  
date and receive suitable training 
and development

The Senior Independent Director provides a sounding  
board for the Chairman and serves as an intermediary for 
the other Directors when necessary. The Non-Executive 
Directors meet regularly throughout the year without the 
Executive Directors present.

Induction, business  
awareness and development 

The Chairman is responsible for ensuring that  
new Directors receive a comprehensive and formal  
induction. This includes: 
 • An overview of the Group, its functions  

and governance framework 

 • Briefings on Directors’ responsibilities  

and compliance responsibilities 
 • Site visits to key Group locations
 • Detailed reviews of the strategic projects  

and initiatives underway

 • One-to-one meetings with senior management 
Kevin Quinn was appointed in November 2016, and Hugo 
Wahnish and Yngve Myhre appointed in November 2017. 
Kevin has received, and Hugo and Yngve are receiving,  
a full induction covering all of the above matters. 

91

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | GovernanceSTRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONDuring the year, the Board visited the following sites:

Independence of Directors

FVG Asia 
Chonburi, Thailand

INVE Aquaculture  
shrimp trials facility  
Chonburi, Thailand 

INVE Aquaculture advanced nutrition 
production facility 
Phichit, Thailand

INVE Aquaculture 
Dendermonde

FAI Farms  
Oxford, UK

Benchmark Holdings plc  
and Improve International  
Sheffield, UK

Aquaculture diagnostics  
laboratory (Animal Health division)

Aquaculture research centre  
and trials facility (Advanced  
Nutrition division)

Advanced nutrition manufacturing 
site (Advanced Nutrition division)

INVE Aquaculture headquarters  
and R&D facilities (Advanced 
Nutrition division)

Working research farm and location 
of terrestrial vaccine trials facility 
(Knowledge Services division)

Benchmark’s head office, hosting 
the finance team and veterinary 
training laboratories (Knowledge 
Services division)

During the year, the Board received presentations from, 
and discussed strategy with, several members of the 
management team, including: 
 • The heads of each of the Advanced Nutrition, Genetics, 
Animal Health and Knowledge Services divisions, 
regarding three year strategic plans, synergies, 
investments, growth opportunities and key risks. 
 • The Heads of R&D of the Advanced Nutrition division  

and Animal Health division regarding the product pipeline, 
R&D expenditure, the portfolio’s strategic focuses,  
late stage and major products, timelines to launch,  
risks, and opportunities. 

 • The Head of IP Commercialisation regarding the Group’s 
intellectual property strategy and discussed the capture 
and utilisation of IP within the business, key IP assets 
and risks.

 • The information technology team, regarding the  

Group’s strategy for supporting the business through  
the coming years.

 • The Health and Safety Manager regarding health and 
safety near miss and incident reporting, approach to 
health and safety, areas of risk, mitigating action, and 
proposed investment. 

 • The Head of People regarding talent management  
and personnel development within the workforce. 

 • The Knowledge Services division in relation  
to opportunities for data analytics across the  
business, focusing on the developing needs  
of the aquaculture industry and synergies with  
other Group products and services.

The Board considered each Non-Executive Director’s 
independence on appointment, and concluded that they  
were independent. The Board reviews independence on  
an annual basis and has concluded that the Non-Executive 
Directors all remain independent. 

Non-Executive Directors are appointed for specified terms, 
subject to re-election by shareholders, and terms beyond  
six years are subject to rigorous review. Accordingly,  
Non-Executive Directors are appointed for a maximum of 
two terms of three years, and thereafter may serve for an 
additional period only at the invitation of the Board following 
scrutiny of their continued independence. During FY17,  
Alex Hambro and Susan Searle completed their first three 
year term with the Company, and were each appointed for  
a further term of three years from 18 December 2016. 

The periods of service of our Non-Executive Directors  
are set out below. 

Name

Date of appointment

Term

Alex Hambro 
Chair

18 December 2013

4 years, 1 month

Susan Searle 
Senior Independent Director

18 December 2013

4 years, 1 month

Kevin Quinn 
Non-Executive Director

Hugo Wahnish 
Non-Executive Director

Yngve Myhre 
Non-Executive Director

25 November 2016

1 year, 1 month

6 November 2017

2 months

6 November 2017

2 months

Conflicts of interest

Directors are obliged to seek authorisation from the  
Board before taking up any position which conflicts,  
or which may conflict, with the interests of the Company.  
The Board is empowered to authorise situations of potential 
conflict, where it sees fit, in order that a Director is not in 
breach of his/her duties. The interested Director is excluded 
from voting on the resolution to authorise the conflict. 
The Directors may resolve that any such transaction or 
arrangement be subject to such terms as they may determine. 

All existing external appointments and other such situational 
conflicts of Directors have been considered and authorised 
by the Board, including in relation to the newly appointed 
Non-Executive Directors. 

All Directors are required to ensure that their external 
appointments do not involve a time commitment that would 
adversely affect their responsibilities to the Company, and  
this principle is enshrined in their engagement letters. 

If a Director is a party to or otherwise interested in any 
actual or proposed transaction or other arrangement 
with the Company, or in which the Company is otherwise 
interested, the Director is obliged to declare his/her interest 
in the transaction or arrangement. The Directors may resolve 
that any such transaction or arrangement be subject to  
such terms as they may determine. Where the interest  
is material, the interested Director will not be permitted  
to vote on decisions relating to the matters in which  
he/she has an interest. 

Information and independent  
professional advice

The Company Secretary assists the Chairs of the Board 
and each of the Nomination Committee, Remuneration 
Committee and Audit Committee to ensure that the Directors 
have access to the information and advice they require to 
carry out their roles effectively.

The Directors have access to independent professional advice 
at the Company’s expense. In addition, they have access to 
the services of the Company Secretary, who is responsible 
for advising the Board on corporate governance matters.

ACCOUNTABILITY

Audit Committee Report

Key objective

Responsibilities

The Committee’s key role is to review and report to the 
Board on financial reporting and internal financial control 
effectiveness and to oversee the relationship with the 
external auditor in order to ensure that the interests  
of shareholders are properly protected in this regard.

Membership, meetings and attendance

The composition of the Audit Committee  
during the year was:
 • Kevin Quinn (Chair)
 • Alex Hambro
All Committee members are independent  
Non-Executive Directors.

In addition to the Committee members, there are a number 
of regular attendees at each meeting. The Chief Financial 
Officer (CFO) and lead external audit partner normally 
attend all scheduled Audit Committee meetings. The 
Audit Committee members regularly take time before or 
after a meeting, without any Executive Directors or senior 
management present, to raise any questions and discuss 
issues with the external auditor. The Chairman of the 
Audit Committee meets the CFO and the external auditor 
separately to review current issues and developments prior 
to each meeting of the Audit Committee, such meetings 
often taking place by telephone.

The Audit Committee met four times during the year  
with all members of the Committee in attendance at each.

During the year the main responsibilities were:
 • To review accounting policies and the integrity  

and content of the financial statements;

 • To monitor disclosure controls and procedures  

and the Group’s internal controls;

 • To monitor the integrity of the financial statements  

of the Group, and to assist the Board in ensuring that  
the Annual Report and Accounts 2016/17, when taken  
as a whole, are fair, balanced and understandable;
 • To consider the adequacy and scope of external audits;
 • To monitor the objectivity, independence and 

effectiveness of the external auditor, including the  
scope and expenditure on non-audit work;
 • To review and approve the statements to be  

included in the Annual Report on internal control  
and risk management;

 • To review and report on the significant issues  

considered in relation to the financial statements  
and how they are addressed.

The Committee’s terms of reference are reviewed annually 
and a summary of these are available on the Governance 
section of our website at benchmarkplc.com.

93

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | GovernanceSTRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONActions undertaken during the year

Going Concern

The Committee was presented by management with  
an assessment of the Group’s future cash forecasts and 
profit projections, available facilities, facility headroom, 
banking covenants and the results of a sensitivity  
analysis. The Committee discussed the assessment  
with management and was satisfied that the going concern 
basis of preparation continues to be appropriate for the 
Group and advised the Board accordingly. 

Valuation of biological assets

The Group holds significant biological assets on the  
balance sheet at fair value less costs to sell, with the 
valuation dependent on a number of subjective assumptions, 
including some which relate to future egg sales prices and 
volumes and seasonal variations. The Committee considered 
the accounting policy employed by the Group for biological 
assets, the assumptions used in the valuation calculations 
and the disclosures provided in the financial statements. 
The Committee was satisfied with the accounting policy in 
force and with the judgements applied by management in 
employing this policy.

Risk management

Effective risk management and control is key to the  
delivery of the Group’s business strategy and objectives. 
Risk management and control processes are designed  
to identify, assess, mitigate and monitor significant risks, 
and can only provide reasonable and not absolute assurance 
that the Group will be successful in delivering its objectives. 
The Board is responsible for the oversight of how the Group’s 
strategic, operational, financial, human, legal and regulatory 
risks are managed and for assessing the effectiveness of 
the risk management and internal control framework.

Work has continued to ensure that risk management is 
embedded in the Group’s policies and procedures and to 
continue to maintain the Risk Register to ensure all risks  
are appropriately prioritised and addressed.

A description of the Group’s risk management procedures 
and the work completed in the year is provided in the 
Principal Risks and Uncertainties section on page 78 to 81.

Internal audit

As the Group evolves and grows, the Committee  
continues to monitor whether an internal audit function 
would add significant value as a part of the integrated 
control environment currently operating. During the year 
further consideration has been given to this, and although  
a decision is yet to be made to proceed with internal  
audit, the form and structure of such a potential function  
has been investigated.

The key activities for the Committee for the period  
under review are set out below.

Presentation of results

At the request of the Board, the Committee reviewed  
the presentation of the Group’s unaudited results for the 
six months to 31 March 2017 and the audited results 
for the year to 30 September 2017 to ensure they were 
fair, balanced and understandable and provide sufficient 
information necessary for shareholders and other users 
of the accounts to assess the Group’s position and 
performance, business model and strategy. Particular 
attention was paid to the presentation of the results in the 
income statement following the growth and evolution of the 
Group and the acquisition of INVE Aquaculture in the prior 
year. The board considers the separation of the statutory 
IFRS results into Trading Activities and Investing Activities 
no longer to be appropriate, and a single column approach 
has been adopted, retaining reference to “Adjusted EBITDA” 
and “EBITDA”. “EBITDA” is “earnings before interest, tax, 
depreciation and amortisation, and “Adjusted EBITDA” is 
“EBITDA before exceptional items and acquisition related 
expenditure”. The board regards this an appropriate way 
to present the underlying performance and development of 
the business as it reflects the continuing investment being 
made by the Group, particularly in relation to recent and 
future acquisition activity, and this is how the board monitors 
progress of the existing group businesses. 

Management override of internal controls

The Committee considered the inherent risk of  
management override of internal controls as defined  
by auditing standards. In doing so the Committee  
continue to review the overall robustness of the control 
environment, including consideration of the Group’s 
whistleblowing arrangements and the review by the  
external auditor.

Revenue recognition

The Committee considered the inherent risk of fraud  
in revenue recognition as defined by auditing standards  
and was satisfied that there were no issues arising.

Valuation of goodwill and intangible assets

The Committee considered the carrying value of the  
Group’s businesses, including goodwill and intangible 
assets. The first anniversary of the acquisition of INVE 
Aquaculture occurred during the year, so management 
conducted a review of the acquisition values of the assets 
acquired to ensure their appropriateness. Furthermore, 
management performed an impairment review on goodwill 
and other intangible assets held within the Group. The 
Committee reviewed management’s recommendations, 
which were also reviewed by the external auditor, including 
an evaluation of the appropriateness of the identification 
of cash generating units and the assumptions applied in 
determining asset carrying values. The Committee was 
satisfied with the assumptions and judgements applied by 
management and concluded that no impairment of carrying 
values was required. 

Safeguards and effectiveness  
of the external auditor

The Committee recognises the importance of safeguarding 
auditor objectivity. The following safeguards are in place to 
ensure that auditor independence is not compromised.
 • The Audit Committee carries out an annual review of the 
external auditor as to its independence from the Group in 
all material respects and that it is adequately resourced 
and technically capable to deliver an objective audit to 
shareholders. Based on this review the Audit Committee 
recommends to the Board the continuation, or removal 
and replacement, of the external auditor;

 • A tax adviser separate from the external auditor is 

engaged to provide tax related services;

 • The external auditor may provide audit-related services 
such as regulatory and statutory reporting as well as 
formalities relating to shareholder and other circulars;
 • Non-audit services carried out by the external auditor  

are generally limited to work that is closely related to the 
annual audit or where the work is of such a nature that  
a detailed understanding of the business is beneficial;

 • The external auditor may undertake due diligence 

reviews and provide assistance on tax matters given 
its knowledge of the Group’s business. Such provision 
is assessed on a case-by-case basis so that the best 
adviser is retained. The Audit Committee monitors the 
application of policy in this regard and keeps the policy 
under review;

 • The Audit Committee reviews all fees paid for audit 

and consultancy services on a regular basis to assess 
the reasonableness of fees, value of delivery and any 
independence issues that may have arisen or may 
potentially arise in the future;

 • The external auditor reports to the Directors and  

the Audit Committee regarding their independence in 
accordance with Auditing Standards. KPMG’s policy is 
that audit partners are required to be rotated every fifth 
year, and audit senior management require approval from 
the Engagement Partner and Engagement Quality Control 
Reviewer every seven years, and approval from the UK 
Audit Risk Management Partner to continue after 10 
years, but such approval will be rare and only likely for 
one or two years;

 • Different teams are used on all other assignments 

undertaken by the auditor;

 • The Audit Committee monitors these costs in absolute 
terms and in the context of the audit fee for the year, to 
ensure that the potential to affect auditor independence 
and objectivity does not arise. The Committee does not 
adopt a formulaic approach to this assessment. The 
split between audit and non-audit fees for 2017 and 
information on the nature of the non-audit fees incurred 
is detailed in Note 1 accompanying the consolidated 
financial statements.

The Audit Committee monitors the effectiveness of the 
external audit functions. To comply with this requirement, 
the Committee reviews and comments on the external audit 
plans before it approves them. It then considers progress 
during the year by assessing the major findings of their work, 
the perceptiveness of observations, the implementation 
of recommendations and management feedback. At the 
request of the Board, the Committee also monitors the 
integrity of all financial statements in the Annual Report and 
half year results statements, and the significant financial 
reporting judgements contained in them. Further details of 
the Committee’s procedures to review the effectiveness of 
the Group’s systems of internal control during the year can 
be found in the section on effective risk management and 
internal control below.

The Committee recognises that all financial statements 
include estimates and judgements by management. The key 
audit areas are agreed with management and the external 
auditors as part of the year-end audit planning process.  
This includes an assessment by management both at 
business unit and at Group level of the significant areas 
requiring management judgement. These areas are reviewed 
with the auditors to ensure that appropriate levels of audit 
work are completed and the results of this work are reviewed 
by the Committee.

Effective risk management  
and internal control

One of the Board’s key responsibilities is to ensure that 
management maintains a system of internal control which 
provides assurance of effective and efficient operations, 
internal financial controls and compliance with law and 
regulation. The Group’s systems are designed to identify 
key financial and other risks to the Group’s business and 
reputation, and to ensure that appropriate controls are 
in place. Consideration is given to the relative costs and 
benefits of implementing specific controls.

Assurance

On behalf of the Board, the Audit Committee examines  
the effectiveness of:
 • the systems of internal control, primarily through  

reviews of the financial controls for financial reporting 
of the annual, preliminary and half yearly financial 
statements and a review of the nature, scope and  
reports of external audit;

 • the management of risk by reviewing evidence  
of risk assessment and management; and

 • any action taken to manage critical risks or to remedy  
any control failings or weaknesses identified, ensuring 
these are managed through to closure.

95

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | GovernanceSTRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONInternal control system

The internal controls which provide assurance to  
the Committee of effective and efficient operations,  
internal financial controls and compliance with law  
and regulation include:
 • A formal authorisation process for investments;
 • An organisational structure where authorities and 
responsibilities for financial management and 
maintenance of financial controls are clearly defined;
 • Anti-bribery and corruption policies and procedures  

and a dedicated email hotline, designed to address the 
specific areas of risk of corruption faced by the Group; 
 • A comprehensive financial review cycle where annual 
budgets and subsequent reforecasts are formally 
approved by the Board and monthly variances are 
reviewed against detailed financial and operating plans.

Kevin Quinn 
Chairman of the Audit Committee 
23 January 2018

Where appropriate, the Audit Committee ensures that 
necessary actions have been, or are being, taken to 
remedy or mitigate significant failings or weaknesses 
identified during the year either from internal review or 
from recommendations raised by the external auditor. The 
Group’s internal controls over the financial reporting and 
consolidation processes are designed under the supervision 
of the CFO to provide reasonable assurance regarding the 
reliability of financial reporting and the preparation and fair 
presentation of the Group’s published financial statements 
for external reporting purposes in accordance with IFRS.

Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over 
financial reporting cannot provide absolute assurance and 
may not prevent or detect all misstatements whether caused 
by error or fraud. The Group’s internal controls over financial 
reporting and the preparation of consolidated financial 
information include policies and procedures that provide 
reasonable assurance that transactions have been recorded 
and presented accurately.

Management regularly conducts reviews of the internal 
controls in place in respect of the processes of preparing 
consolidated financial information and financial reporting. 
During the year ended 30 September 2017, the Group 
installed new consolidation software to increase the 
efficiency and accuracy of the consolidation process, 
primarily as a result of the ongoing growth in the Group. 
This process was run parallel to the previous consolidation 
system for three months to ensure ongoing accurate 
reporting. There were no other changes to the internal 
controls over these processes that have or are reasonably 
likely to materially affect the level of assurance provided  
over the reliability of the financial statements.

Risk management and  
internal control system features

Risk management control system

As well as the risks that management identify through  
the ongoing processes of reporting and performance 
analysis, the Audit Committee has additional risk 
identification processes, which include:
 • risk and control process for identifying, evaluating 

and managing major business risks. A risk register is 
maintained defining each business risk identified and 
quantifying its likely impact to ensure adequate priority  
is given to each in turn;

 • external audit reports, which comment on controls  
to manage identified risks and identify new ones; and

 • a confidential whistle-blowing helpline and an  

email address available for employees to contact  
the Non-executive Directors in confidence.

REMUNERATION

Remuneration Report for year ended 30 September 2017

Statement from Susan Searle, Chairman  
of the Remuneration Committee

This year has been focused on further development  
of the underlying business and its pipeline, extraction 
of synergies from the acquisitions and infrastructure 
investments made and the scaling of the organisation and 
its people. The underlying health of the business for the 
medium to long-term is strong and many of the actions taken 
this year position the business well to deliver in the coming 
years. However, these drivers of value were not reflected in 
the share price movement experienced by our shareholders 
with the share price falling significantly following our trading 
update in September that disappointed the market in 
respect of 2017 financial performance. This picture was 
mixed with good growth in revenue, especially in Genetics 
and Advanced Nutrition but the delay of significant revenue 
into next year from the launch of Ectosan® in the Animal 
Health division contributed to a shortfall in that division 
and lower than expected EBITDA. This reflects the inherent 
uncertainty in timing of bringing such an innovative new 
product to market, and we are pleased that post year end 
the launch is proving very successful and the opportunity  
is bigger than that of previous new sea lice medicines, with 
the inclusion of the innovative CleanTreat® system which  
has wider application.

In terms of investments and extraction of synergies, the 
business has made solid progress. The SalmoBreed Salten 
project has been extremely well managed and will prove to 
be a valuable asset in delivering all year round from a fully 
biosecure environment in Norway. We are pleased that the 
new vaccine manufacturing facility in Braintree is now in 
commissioning and with new development products being 
put through the plant, is moving closer to the original plan  
for the site. The extraction of synergies from recent 
acquisitions is a five year program and good progress 
has been made in a number of areas, especially in the 
collaboration between shrimp feeding and breeding. The 
company is well positioned as a leader in aquaculture.

Our plans for development of the team were impacted by 
the absence through illness of Roland Bonney, but with the 
changes in management organisation we have put in place 
(as discussed in on pages 66 to 67), the right organisation 
structure for the future is now set. We are encouraged that 
some extremely talented people have been attracted into the 
business and a Chief Scientific Officer will join Malcolm and 
Mark as an executive director in 2018. 

Whilst the executives have clearly worked very hard this year 
in laying down further the right foundations for the business, 
shareholders have yet to see this reflected in our financial 
performance and the value creation of an appropriate share 
price has clearly been deferred. Against this background, 
the Remuneration Committee determined that, save for a 
nominal cross company cash bonus of £500, it was more 
appropriate to allocate a number of market value options, 
with vesting over three years to the two Executive Directors 
rather than to award immediate cash bonuses based on the 
delivery of the medium to long-term objectives. This move 
has been reflected across the whole organisation. This does 
two things; it allows cash to be deployed for investment in 

the longer term opportunities within the business  
and further aligns executive directors and management  
to shareholders in the value creation associated with 
delivery of strategy, stronger financial performance, and 
share price improvement. Last year, we reported that we  
had benchmarked salaries with the external market and 
moved them into the lower end of the comparator band, 
reflecting the issues discussed above. We have not sought 
to make any significant change this year and plan to revisit 
this with an update to the benchmark data when 2018 
performance on integration and financial delivery is clear.

The Committee has sought to balance the challenge  
of rewarding executives when progress towards medium  
to long-term objectives is being made but short-term 
financial performance and share price performance within 
the year are more challenging. We believe we have struck 
the right balance but welcome shareholder feedback.

Susan Searle 
Chairman of the Remuneration Committee 
23 January 2018

Remuneration Committee overview

The composition of the Remuneration Committee  
during the year was:
 • Susan Searle (Chair)
 • Kevin Quinn
The Committee comprises two independent Non-Executive 
Directors with the Company Secretary acting as secretary 
and the Head of People attending committee meetings to 
provide advice on policies and practices. At appropriate 
times, the Committee invites the views of the Chief 
Executive and Chairman of the Board, and seeks advice  
from independent remuneration consultants. No director  
or employee is present when his or her own remuneration  
or fees are discussed.

Key objectives: The key objectives of the Remuneration 
Committee are to develop the Company’s policy on executive 
remuneration and to fix the remuneration of the Executive 
Directors, Chairman of the Board and senior managers.

Responsibilities: The main responsibilities  
of the Committee are:
 • To monitor and develop the Company’s  

remuneration policy

 • To determine the remuneration of the Executive Directors
 • To approve the service agreements of the  

Executive Directors

 • To approve the remuneration of senior managers 
 • To determine the fees of the Chairman 
 • To review the Company’s annual bonus proposals  

and to approve bonuses for the Executive Directors  
and senior managers

97

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | GovernanceSTRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATION • To approve the design of and oversee all awards  
under the Company’s share incentive plans
 • To consider risks to the Group in light of its  

remuneration policies 

An overview of the Remuneration Committee’s terms  
of reference is available on the Governance section of  
our website at benchmarkplc.com.

Actions undertaken during the year: During the year 
the Remuneration Committee carried out a review of 
employee base salaries and implemented in the UK, the 
policy of paying the living wage as described by the Living 
Wage foundation to all employees (with the exception of 
apprentices) regardless of whether they work full or part time 
or on a temporary basis. Work is underway to ensure that in 
our overseas jurisdictions where similar organisations exist 
our pay reflects the levels that they advocate, and where 
they do not, to establish a level of pay that is set above the 
minimum wage. The introduction of gender pay gap reporting 
has been of interest to the Committee who recognise that 
at senior management level women are under-represented, 
steps are being taken to address this. As Benchmark has 
fewer than 250 employees in any one entity within the UK 
we are not required to report our gender pay gap figures, 
however, it is our intention to do so voluntarily.

Following the reorganisation of the management team, the 
Committee has continued to work on succession planning 
across the Group to ensure that we have the skills required 
to drive success in all our markets.

Directors’ Remuneration Policy

The Group’s policy is unchanged and seeks to balance  
three key objectives:
 • To pay competitively in the relevant talent markets 
to sustain motivation and commitment, recognising 
that Benchmark has a unique culture and staff join 
and remain with Benchmark in order to share in the 
Company's vision for sustainability and participate  
in the important work it does 

 • To remunerate in a way that makes economic sense for 
the Company, ensuring there is a fair balance of return to 
the executive team, management, staff and shareholders 
for their contributions to the Company’s success

 • To encourage the cooperative behaviours which promote 

business priorities and lead to high performance 

The Company’s remuneration policy supports a climate 
of team involvement and generates a shared enthusiasm 
for the growth and success of the Group as a whole. It 
encourages cooperation, sharing of ideas and mutual 
support between people in different business units. The 
policy reflects and supports the sense that the Group is 
involved in creating and delivering services which benefit 
mankind and the natural environment. It also recognises that 
the non-monetary rewards of team membership, intellectual 
stimulation, freedom, creativity and producing something 
worthwhile, have equal or higher place in maintaining 
personal commitment and in attracting and retaining the 
best people. 

Remuneration policy

The Executive Directors’ remuneration comprises fixed 
elements in the form of a base salary, benefits and pension 
contributions, and a variable discretionary element in the 
form of a bonus, which may be satisfied in cash, deferred 
shares (or share options) or a combination of both. This 
year the Executive Directors are not receiving cash bonuses, 
other than a nominal cross group figure mentioned in the 
Chairman’s report, but are instead receiving awards of 
market value share options under the Benchmark Company 
Share Option Plan (CSOP) I, as described on page 97. 
Other than these awards, the Company does not intend to 
make further awards under the share plans to the Executive 
Directors in the coming year.

Fixed elements of remuneration 

The fixed elements of the Executive Directors’ remuneration 
are designed to attract and retain directors of the appropriate 
calibre, with the requisite knowledge, skills and experience, 
and to sustain motivation and commitment. 

Following a further review by MM&K of executive salaries in 
2016 the Remuneration Committee substantially increased 
the Executive Directors’ salaries in January 2017 to bring 
them into the lower end of a band of AIM/main listed 
companies where Benchmark Holdings plc sits in terms of 
turnover and market capitalisation. The Executive Directors’ 
salaries from IPO had been substantially below those of their 
peer group. This year the Executive Directors base salaries 
were adjusted in line with other employees across the Group. 
Over the next 2–3 years the Company expects to be at 
median for the comparator range once the combined business 
delivers on its plans and this is reflected in the share price.

The Executive Directors all participate in defined  
contribution pension schemes on terms consistent  
with those of other employees. The Company contributes  
up to 10 per cent of the employee’s salary, starting at 5  
per cent and increasing by 1 per cent for every three years  
of service. The Executive Directors also receive private 
medical insurance for themselves and their families and 
death in service benefits.

Variable elements of remuneration

Executive Directors are eligible for an annual performance 
bonus, part or all of which may be deferred for three years 
and paid in shares or share options. The maximum award, 
including any deferred element, is 100 per cent of salary. 
The bonus is designed to reward and incentivise success 
leading to sustainable long-term growth and to recognise the 
Directors’ commitment to the business. Four key metrics are 
used to evaluate performance of the Executive Directors:
 • Progress towards the Group’s objectives of mid to  

long-term growth in revenue and trading earnings per share

 • Successful and secure investment of the Group’s 

available capital in long-term revenue and generation  
of EBITDA from trading activities 

 • Building on the Group’s track record of recruiting the 

highest calibre and most appropriate people, in terms  
of skills and experience

 • Establishing a strong and long-lasting leadership  
position in the development of sustainable food and 
farming internationally 

The Remuneration Committee exercises judgment in 
assessing performance against these metrics when setting 
bonus levels for the Executive Directors. The remuneration 
of senior management is also taken into consideration.  
The bonus is discretionary and no element of the bonus  
is guaranteed. 

Statement of consideration of employment 
conditions elsewhere in the Group

Historically, the salaries across the Group have been 
increased annually by reference to the consumer price 
index (CPI). In 2017, the average salary increase across the 
Group including senior management was 4.8 per cent. This 
percentage rise included adjustments made for additional 
responsibilities taken on by staff as the Group’s activities 
expanded. The entitlements of the Executive Directors to 
pension contributions are the same as those of employees. 
Bonuses for employees are determined on a discretionary 
basis, by reference to a combination of Group and individual 
performance. Senior managers’ bonuses for 2017 will be 
paid part in cash, and part will be deferred and satisfied in 
share options with an exercise price equal to market value 
of the Benchmark shares on the date of grant.

The Company aims to encourage everyone in the team to 
have an interest in the Company’s shares in order to foster a 
culture of cooperation and shared participation in the Group’s 
achievements and the remuneration policy supports this by 
issuing share options to employees at a level that reflects the 
strategic contribution of their role. In 2017, 436,702 share 
options were issued to 53 employees across the Group.

Executive Directors’ service contracts and 
remuneration on termination

Each Executive Director contract commenced on 18 
December 2013 and is terminable by either party on 12 
months’ notice at any time, and by the Company at any time 
and without compensation in case of serious misconduct, 
breach of duty or in similar circumstances. As a result of  
a period of ill-health, Roland Bonney stepped down as COO 
on 28 July 2017. We are very pleased to say that he has 
subsequently returned to the business as Group Lead,  
Key Account Management.

In the event of termination by the Company without cause, 
the Executive Director is entitled to receive payment of salary 
for any unexpired notice period and any accrued holiday 
entitlement. In the event of termination for cause, the 
Director is not entitled to compensation in respect of salary.

The Executive Directors’ bonuses are fully discretionary.  
In the event of termination during a bonus period, the 
Committee will consider payment of a bonus on a pro rata 
basis for the relevant portion of the year worked, having 
regard to the circumstances. Deferred bonuses which have 
been satisfied in share options remain exercisable where the 
Executive Director is a good leaver, including in case of death, 
incapacity, redundancy, retirement, and where the Remuneration 
Committee so determines. In all other circumstances, deferred 
bonuses satisfied in share options cease to be exercisable  
on termination of employment and lapse. 

Non-Executive Directors’ terms of appointment

The Non-Executive Directors hold office under letters of 
appointment. Each appointment is for a term of three years 
but with an additional period of three years anticipated.  
All directors are required to stand for re-election at least 
every three years. Alex Hambro and Susan Searle were 
appointed for a further three year term by the Board in 
December 2016. Kevin Quinn was appointed as a new 
Non-Executive Director on 25 November 2016, replacing 
Basil Brookes as Chair of the Audit Committee and on 
the Remuneration Committee. In accordance with the UK 
Corporate Governance Code, Kevin Quinn, Malcolm Pye and 
Susan Searle stood for re-election at the Annual General 
Meeting held on 10 March 2017 and all were re-elected. 

Following the year end, Hugo Wahnish and Yngve Myhre  
were appointed as new Non-Executive Directors. Both will 
stand for election at the AGM to be held on 8 March 2018.

Either the Company or the Non-Executive Director may 
terminate the appointment on three months’ notice, and 
the appointments are subject to the Company’s articles 
of association and to the Director being re-elected by 
shareholders upon retirement by rotation. On termination  
as a result of the Non-Executive Director not being re-elected 
by shareholders or under the articles of association for 
reasons connected with outside interests or independence, 
the appointment terminates immediately and the  
Non-Executive Director is not entitled to compensation.  
On termination in other circumstances, including on  
three months’ notice, a Non-Executive Director is entitled  
to accrued but unpaid directors’ fees to the date of 
termination but no other compensation.

The dates of appointment of and length of service for  
each Non-Executive Director are shown in the table below.

Name

Date of appointment

Length of service 
as at 2018 AGM

Alex Hambro

18 December 2013

4 year, 2 months

Susan Searle

18 December 2013

4 year, 2 months

Kevin Quinn

25 November 2016

1 year, 2 months

Hugo Wahnish

6 November 2017

4 months

Yngve Myhne

6 November 2017

4 months

Shareholder dilution

The total number of ordinary shares issued and issuable in 
respect of options granted in any ten year period under the 
Company’s discretionary share option schemes (excluding 
pre-IPO options under the Enterprise Management Incentive 
(EMI) scheme) is restricted to 10% of the Company’s issued 
ordinary shares from time to time. 

In the financial year ended 30 September 2017 the 
Company allocated 463,702 nominal cost share options 
(0.09% of issued share capital) to staff including senior 
management as mentioned on page 100. 

99

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | GovernanceSTRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATION 
Annual Report on Remuneration for 2017

Single total figure of remuneration for the financial year ended 30 September 2017 

The remuneration in respect of qualifying services of the directors who served during the financial year ended  
30 September 2017 is as set out below. 

Executive Directors

Salary 

Bonus (a)

Taxable benefits 
(b)

Long-term 
incentive

Roland Bonney

Mark Plampin

Malcolm Pye

243,750

230,000

282,500

500

500

500

2,391

2,592

6,010

-

-

-

Pension

24,375

15,517

28,250

2017

271,016

248,609

317,268

Total

2016

288,942

268,757

318,121

(a)  The balance of the cash bonuses will be paid in February 2018. Options with an exercise price equal to market value in lieu of a cash bonus in the year to 
September 2017, will be granted to the Executive Directors shortly after the date of this report. Further details can be found in the bonus section below.

(b)  Benefits provided for all Executive Directors are medical insurance coverage for the Directors and their families, and death in service benefits.  

Also includes taxable mileage payments as a result of the Company’s policy of paying 55p per business mile (10p per mile paid over the HMRC  
rate of 45p per mile is taxable via P11Ds).

Non-Executive Directors’ fees for the financial year ended 30 September 2017 

No changes were made to the Non-Executive Directors’ fees in the financial year ended 30 September 2017.  
Kevin Quinn was appointed as a new Non-Executive Director on 25 November 2016. 

Statement of Implementation of Remuneration Policy in 2018

Executive Directors’ salaries

From 1 January 2018, the Executive Directors’ base pay was increased as set out below.

Mark Plampin

Malcolm Pye

Bonus

The 2018 bonus will be implemented in line with the future policy described above.

2017

255,175

316,417

Salary (£)

2016

250,000

310,000

Increase in salary 
2017 to 2018 (%)

2.07%

2.07%

Executive Directors’ salaries were reviewed with effect from 1 January 2018. Having regard to the Group’s performance  
in 2017, the increases awarded are shown on page 101.

LTIP

Non-Executive Directors

Alex Hambro

Susan Searle

Kevin Quinn

2017

45,000

45,000

38,365

Fees (£)

2016

45,000

45,000

-

Although the Board believes that the Chairman’s fees and the fees of the Committee may be out of line with market  
practice it has been decided not to adjust them given the share price performance during the year. However, given the  
size, scale and complexity of the business has changed considerably, a review of fees will be undertaken in 2018 with  
a view to implementation in the following year. 

Executive Directors’ bonuses for the financial year ended 30 September 2017

As described in the Chairman’s statement, the Remuneration Committee considered the performance of the Executive 
Directors against the delivery of long-term sustainable growth and their performance against four KPIs set out on page 98. 

Accordingly, the Executive Directors received bonuses in respect of the financial year ended 30 September 2017 as set out below. 

Roland Bonney (resigned as COO on 28th July 2017)

Mark Plampin

Malcolm Pye

2017(a)

500

500

500

Bonus (£)

2016

99,000

93,000(b)

110,000

(a)  The remuneration committee has decided, in lieu of cash, save for a nominal cross company cash bonus of £500, market value share options will be granted 

following publication of the annual results, in accordance with the company’s share plan rules. Malcolm Pye will be granted 500,000 options, Mark Plampin will 
receive 400,000 options and Roland Bonney will receive 100,000 options. The exact value of these awards cannot be determined until the date of grant.

(b) Mark Plampin received £37,200 in cash and the balance in nominal cost share options.

Defined contribution pension scheme

The Executive Directors all participate in defined contribution pension schemes. Roland Bonney and Malcolm Pye participate 
in the Benchmark Holdings Executive Pension Scheme and Mark Plampin participates in a self-invested personal pension (SIPP). 

In accordance with the policy set out on page 98, the Company contributes 10 per cent of salary for each of Roland Bonney 
and Malcolm Pye, and 7 per cent of salary for Mark Plampin.

LTIP awards

No awards under the Company’s share plans were made to Executive Directors in the financial year ended 30 September 2017. 

Executive Directors’ external appointments 

None of the Executive Directors held non-executive directorships or external appointments with organisations other than the 
Company in the financial year ended 30 September 2017.

The Company will use the CSOP shortly after the publication of the annual results in 2018 to grant awards to the  
Executive Directors in lieu of a cash bonus as described in the introduction to this report. 

Additional information on Directors’ interests

Directors’ interests under the Company’s employee share plans

Details of the Executive Directors’ interests in outstanding share awards under the employee share plans during  
the financial year ended 30 September 2017 are set out below.

Share option 
scheme

Options 
held at 30 
September 
2016

Options 
exercised in 
year

Options 
granted in 
year

At 30 
September 
2017

Exercise price

Grant date

Date from which 
exercisable

Mark Plampin

EMI Scheme

135,000

135,000

-

0.1p

29 August 2013

29 August 2016

Mark Plampin

CSOP II

67,647

135,000

56,938

124,585

0.1p

6 March 2017

5 March 2020

Directors’ interests in ordinary shares 

At 30 September 2017, the interests of the Directors and their connected persons in ordinary shares was as follows. 

Roland Bonney

Alex Hambro 

Malcolm Pye

Mark Plampin

Susan Searle 

Kevin Quinn

Interests in ordinary shares  
at 30 September 2017

% of Company’s issued share  
capital at 30 September 2017 (c)

Interests in ordinary shares  
at 30 September 2016 

15,145,686

100,000 (a)

15,145,686

536,686 (b)

98,125 (a)

25,000

2.90%

0.02%

2.90%

0.10%

0.02%

0%

15,145,686

46,875 

15,145,686

401,686 

98,125 

-

(a) Held through self-invested personal pension (SIPP).

(b)  Comprising 265,000 ordinary shares registered in own name, 267,000 ordinary shares held through self-invested  
personal pension (SIPP) and 4,686 ordinary shares held through the Benchmark employee share incentive plan. 

(c) As at 30 September 2017.

Susan Searle 
Chairman of the Remuneration Committee 
23 January 2018

101

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | GovernanceSTRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATION 
 
 
 
SHAREHOLDERS

Share capital and share holdings

The Company’s issued share capital, together with details 
of movements during the year, are shown in note 25 
accompanying the financial statements. The Company  
has one class of ordinary share which carries no right to 
fixed income. Each ordinary share carries the right to one 
vote at general meetings of the Company.

As at 22 January 2017 the Company has been notified of 
the following substantial shareholdings under Rule 5 of the 
UKLA’s Disclosure and Transparency Rules:

% of issued share capital 

Woodford Investment Management Limited

FERD AS

Invesco Limited

Lansdowne Partners International Limited

Lansdowne Partners Limited

Lansdowne Partners (UK) LLP

The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc

Harwood Capital

25.10

16.67

16.17

9.88

6.84

3.54

Engagement with shareholders

The Board recognises that engagement with shareholders 
is vital to the success of the business, and to ensuring that 
shareholders understand the strategy of the Company and 
the means by which that strategy will be delivered.  

The Board welcomes regular and open engagement  
with its shareholders.

A number of meetings were held between institutional 
shareholders and both Executive and Non-Executive 
Directors (together and independently) throughout the year. 
The Company held a capital markets day for institutional 
shareholders which included presentations regarding 
the macro environment; the aquaculture industry and 
Benchmark’s positioning within it; and the strategies, 
assets, capabilities, and markets of each of the Genetics, 
Animal Health, Advanced Nutrition and Knowledge Services 
divisions; and the Company’s financial model and capital 
structure. Shareholders had the opportunity to meet with the 
Board and senior management and to discuss and challenge 
the strategy of the Company. The Directors attended the 
Annual General Meeting and were available for questions 
and discussion both in and following the meeting. 

The Chairman is responsible for ensuring that major 
shareholders are able to access and engage with all 
members of the Board. The Chairman is also responsible  
for ensuring that the Board is aware of any feedback 
received from, or concerns raised by, major shareholders, 
and that these views are taken into account. The Board 
regularly discusses feedback from meetings and other 
liaison with major shareholders. If shareholders have 
concerns which have not been resolved by means of contact 
through other channels, or for which such channels are 
inappropriate, they are welcome to contact the Senior 
Independent Director.

DIRECTORS’ REPORT

The Directors present their Annual Report and audited 
financial statements of the Company and of the Group for 
the year ended 30 September 2017.

Benchmark Holdings plc is a public limited company, 
incorporated and domiciled in England and Wales. Its shares 
are admitted to trading on AIM, London Stock Exchange’s 
international market for smaller growing companies.

The disclosure requirements of the Companies Act 2006, 
and where the Directors have deemed it appropriate, the 
UK Disclosure and Transparency Rules, have been met 
by the contents of this Directors’ Report, along with the 
Strategic Report, Corporate Governance Report, Nomination 
Committee Report, Audit Report and Remuneration Report, 
which should be read in conjunction with this report.

UK Corporate Governance Code

The Company complies with the principles of the Code. 
A copy of the Code is available from the website of the 
Financial Reporting Council (frc.org.uk). Benchmark  
complies with the main principles of the Code, as set  
out in the diagram on page 103.

During the year, the Company did not comply with the 
following aspects of the Code: 
 • The Nomination Committee evaluates the performance 
of the Board as a whole and in doing so evaluates the 
performance of each of the Directors, but a formal 
evaluation of the performance of individual Directors  
is not undertaken. 

 • The Company is not subject to the Listing Rules and is 
not required to make a longer term viability statement.

 • The bonus element of the Executive Directors’ 

remuneration is performance related and based on 
four key performance indicators. The Company believes 
that purely financial targets can lead to focus on 
delivery of short-term goals at the expense of long-term 
success, and the key performance indicators used to 
determine performance based remuneration involve an 
element of discretion, which is exercised critically by the 
Remuneration Committee. The Remuneration Committee 
intends to review these key performance indicators in 
the coming year to ensure that they remain relevant and 
appropriate for the Group in light of its growth.

Overview of compliance with principles of UK Corporate Governance Code

A. Leadership

A.1 Role of Board

The Board is collectively responsible for the long-term success of the Group, and oversees the development and delivery 
of strategy and operations. It does this by exercising oversight and control over the performance of the Company through 
review of management financial information; agreeing budgetary targets; approving investment programmes and monitoring 
their execution against budget and returns on investment. (See page 87)

A.2  Clear division of 
responsibilities 

There is a clear division of responsibilities between the Chairman and the Chief Executive Officer which is described on 
page 91 of this report. 

A.3 Role of Chairman 

The Chairman leads the Board, setting and managing the agenda, and promoting open and constructive discussion and 
challenge. (See page 91)

A.4  Role of Non-Executive 

Directors

The Board has a culture of transparency and open debate, and the Non-Executive Directors constructively challenge the 
Executive Directors regarding the strategy and its implementation. (See page 87)

B. Effectiveness

B.1 Composition of the Board

Two new Non-Executive Directors were recently appointed to strengthen the pharmaceutical and aquaculture expertise on 
the Board. The Board and the Nomination Committee is of the view that the Board contains an appropriate breadth and 
balance of skills, knowledge, experience and independence. 

B.2 Board appointments 

The Nomination Committee leads the process for the appointment of new Directors, and follow a formal and rigorous 
process, with the assistance of independent external recruiters, and taking into account the Group’s policies regarding 
diversity. This process was followed in relation to the recent appointments of Hugo Wahnish and Yngve Myhre. 

B.3 Time commitments 

Non-Executive Directors are notified of and agree to the required time commitments prior to appointment, and external 
directorships which may impact existing time commitments must be agreed with the Chairman. (See pages 93)

B.4 Training and development 

New Directors receive a comprehensive and formal induction programme which is tailored to their role and needs, and the 
Board receives updates regarding the business and regulatory developments. (See pages 91)

B.5  Provision of information  

and support 

The Chairman, supported by the Company Secretary, ensures that Board members receive accurate and timely information 
and other support requested, including access to external legal advice. (See pages 93)

B.6  Board and Committee 

performance evaluations

Following a formal evaluation of the Board’s performance, size and composition in 2015, which was kept under review, it 
was determined to strengthen the Board with pharmaceutical and aquaculture sector expertise, in an international forum. 
Two new Non-Executive Directors were appointed shortly after the year end.

B.7 Re-election of Directors 

The Articles of Association require Directors to retire by rotation at the third Annual General Meeting after the Annual 
General Meeting at which they were elected. (See pages 104)

C. Accountability

C.1  Financial and  

business reporting

The Board has reviewed this Annual Report and the results for the year to 30 September 2017 to ensure that the Annual 
Report and Accounts, taken as a whole, are fair, balanced and understandable. (See pages 106)

C.2  Risk management and 

internal control systems 

The Board is responsible for ensuring that the Company has in place effective procedures for the management of risk, and 
that the principal risks faced by the Group are identified, assessed, appropriately mitigated and monitored. Pages 78 to 81 
of this report set out the Company’s risk framework and risk management activity. 

C.3  Role and responsibilities  
of the Audit Committee

Responsibility for oversight of the Group’s financial reporting procedures, internal controls and audit process is delegated to 
the Audit Committee, which also oversees the Group’s risk management framework. (See pages 93 to 96)

D. Remuneration

D.1  Executive Directors’ 

remuneration

The policy for determining the remuneration of Executive Directors is set out in the Remuneration Report on pages  
99 to 101. No Director is involved in setting his/her own remuneration.

D.2 Remuneration policy 

The Company’s remuneration policy is set out in the Remuneration Report on pages 99 to 101. 

E. Relations with Shareholders

E.1 Shareholder engagement 

The Board engages actively and regularly with its shareholders. The Chairman and Senior Independent Director are available 
for discussions with major shareholders, and the Board is kept appraised of their views and feedback. (See pages 102) 

E.2 Use of general meetings

The Directors are always available at the AGM to meet with shareholders, who are invited to raise questions and also to 
meet with the Board following the formal business of the meeting. (See pages 104)

103

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | GovernanceSTRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONAnnual General Meeting

The next Annual General Meeting will be held at 12.00pm on 
8 March 2018 at Travers Smith LLP, 10 Snow Hill, London, 
EC1A 2AL. Details of the AGM are set out in the Notice of 
AGM which is being posted to shareholders with this report. 

The Directors will be available at the AGM to answer 
questions and for discussion with shareholders following 
conclusion of the formal business of the meeting. 

Directors

The Directors who held office during the year were as follows:

Alex Hambro 
Susan Searle 
Kevin Quinn (appointed 25 November 2016) 
Malcolm Pye  
Mark Plampin 
Roland Bonney (stepped down 28 July 2017)

The Directors benefited from qualifying third party indemnity 
provisions during the financial year and continue to do so at 
the date of this report.

Re-election of Directors

The re-appointment of Susan Searle and Malcolm Pye, and 
the appointment of Kevin Quinn was approved at the Annual 
General Meeting held on 7 March 2017.

The Articles of Association require Directors to retire by 
rotation at the third Annual General Meeting after the Annual 
General Meeting at which they were elected. The Articles 
also provide that the Board has the power to appoint any 
person to be a Director, and that any Director appointed by 
the Board shall only hold office until the next following AGM. 
Hugo Wahnish and Yngve Myhre was appointed as a Director 
by the Board on 6 November 2017.

At the Annual General Meeting to be held on 8 March 2018, 
Hugo Wahnish and Yngve Myhre are standing for re-election. 

Power to allot shares

Each year at the Annual General Meeting, the Directors  
seek authority to allot shares for the following year. At the 
last AGM held on 7 March 2017, shareholders authorised 
the Directors to allot relevant securities up to an aggregate 
nominal value of £174,006, representing one third of the 
issued share capital, and to further allot equity securities 
up to an additional aggregate nominal value of £174,006 in 
connection with a fully pre-emptive rights issue, in accordance 
with ABI guidance. Directors were authorised to allot for 
cash equity securities having a nominal value not exceeding 
in aggregate £26,100 (being 5 per cent of issued share 
capital) , and to further allot for cash equity securities having 
a nominal value not exceeding in aggregate £26,100 for the 
purpose of financing acquisitions and capital investments. 
The authorities expire at the conclusion of the next AGM.

At the forthcoming AGM, authorities will be sought from 
shareholders similar to those sought at the 2017 AGM.

Authority for the Company  
to purchase its own shares

At the Company’s 2017 Annual General Meeting, 
shareholders renewed the Company’s authorities to make 
market purchases of up to 52,201,825 ordinary shares, 
representing 10 per cent of the Company’s issued share 
capital. These authorities were not used during the year,  
or up to the date of this report. At the 2017 Annual General 
Meeting, shareholders will be asked to renew these 
authorities for another year, and the resolution will once 
again propose a maximum aggregate number of ordinary 
shares which the Company can purchase equal to 10 per 
cent of the Company’s issued ordinary share capital. Details 
are set out in the Notice of Annual General Meeting.

The Company held no treasury shares during the year,  
or at the date of this report.

Length of notice of general meetings 

The Company has taken authority under the Companies Act 
2006 to call general meetings of the Company, other than 
AGMs, on 14 days notice. The 14 day notice period will only 
be used where the flexibility is merited by the business of 
the meeting, and is thought to be in the best interests of 
shareholders as a whole. The Company offers the facility 
for shareholders to vote by electronic means. This facility 
is open to all shareholders and would be available if the 
Company were to call a meeting on 14 clear days’ notice. 

Employee involvement 

The Group has grown significantly since its IPO in 2014, 
and has now established the platform for the next phase 
of its development. As discussed on pages 66 to 67 of 
this report, the management was reviewed during the year 
to ensure that it is appropriate, and has the necessary 
expertise required, to deliver the Company’s strategy. 

The Group now has nearly 1,000 employees in 27 countries, 
and recognises the challenges of communicating strategy 
and information to all its people in an effective and timely 
manner. The following are the principal methods by which the 
Company ensures that all employees receive the information 
they require to optimise their personal performance and that 
of the Group, and to ensure effective functioning of internal 
control systems: 
 • Members of the Operations Board and of the divisional 
boards are responsible for the communication of strategy, 
focuses and relevant developments to their managers and 
teams, and formal and informal meetings are held at local 
level to ensure effective dissemination of such information. 

 • Regular newsletters are received by all employees, and 
include an update from the Executive Directors, together 
with information on business developments within the 
Group, new projects, investment programmes, and news 
regarding the aquaculture and animal health industries.
 • One-off newsletters are used to promptly communicate 
important events, such as the release of results, 
acquisitions, significant business developments and 
other events which are announced to shareholders.

 • Short videos from the Executive are used to communicate 
more personally with the workforce around the world and 
to highlight key matters, such as the significance of and 
the Board’s commitment to Health and Safety on our 
Global Health and Safety Day. 

 • An improved intranet platform was launched during the 
year, which provides comprehensive information on each 
of the businesses within the Group, together with the 
Employee Handbook, policies, toolkits and other relevant 
information to all employees. 

 • Targeted training and workshops are undertaken with the 
workforce to ensure that there is a good understanding 
of the Group’s strategy and values; compliance matters 
including the Share Dealing Code, control of inside 
information, Matters Reserved for the Board, Anti-Bribery 
Policy and Whistleblowing Policy, employee share 
schemes and other matters. 

 • The People Team is responsible for acting as a bridge 
between the business and its employees, ensuring 
effective communication and where appropriate acting  
as mediator.

The Group has a policy of encouraging share ownership  
and over 60 per cent of the Group’s employees hold shares 
or options in the Company.

Political contributions

Neither the Company nor any of its subsidiaries made  
any political donations or incurred any political expenditure 
during the year.

Disclosure of information to auditor 

The Directors who held office at the date of approval  
of this Directors’ report confirm that, so far as they are  
each aware, there is no relevant audit information of which 
the Company’s auditor is unaware; and each Director has 
taken all the steps that he/she ought to have taken as  
a director to make himself/herself aware of any relevant 
audit information and to establish that the Company’s 
auditors is aware of that information. 

Auditor

In accordance with Section 489 of the Companies Act 2006, 
a resolution for the re-appointment of KPMG LLP as auditor 
of the Company is to be proposed at the forthcoming Annual 
General Meeting.

Information elsewhere in the report 

The information set out below is contained in other areas of this report.

Financial instruments

Details of the Group’s financial risk management objectives and policies 
including the Group’s policy for hedging, and the exposure of the Company and its 
subsidiaries to price risk, credit risk, liquidity risk and cash flow risk. 

Important events

Particulars of important events affecting the Company or its subsidiaries.

Post balance sheet events

Description of post balance sheet events. 

Page(s) of this report

127–129

5

None

Future developments

Likely future developments in the business of the Company or its subsidiaries.

12–17, 20, 24

Research and development

Details of research and development activities of the Company and its subsidiaries.

33, 38, 50, 73

Branches outside the UK

Details of the existence of branches outside the UK.

Risk management 

Details of the Company’s risk management framework, activities in the year and principal 
risks and uncertainties 

N/A

78–81

Directors’ remuneration and interests

Details of Directors’ remuneration, interests in shares of the Company, share options and 
pension arrangements. 

97–101

Principal activities and business review

Business review, details of 2017 results, key performance indicators, outlook for future 
years. 

5–63

Financial risk management 

Objectives and policies for management of financial risk. 

Share capital

Details of the issued share capital and movements during the year.

78–81, 94, 96

157

This report was approved by the Board on 22 January 2018 and signed on its behalf. 

Athene Blakeman  
Company Secretary 23 January 2018

105

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | GovernanceSTRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONSTRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCI AL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATI ON

DIRECTORS’ RESPONSIBILITIES

Statement of Directors’ responsibilities in 
relation to the Group financial statements 
and Annual Report

The Directors are responsible for preparing the Group  
and parent Company financial statements in accordance  
with applicable law and regulation. 

Company law requires the Directors to prepare Group and 
parent Company financial statements for each financial year. 
As required by the AIM Rules of the London Stock Exchange, 
they are required to prepare the Group financial statements 
in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards 
as adopted by the EU (IFRSs as adopted by the EU) and 
applicable law and have elected to prepare the parent 
Company financial statements on the same basis. 

Under company law, the Directors must not approve the 
financial statements unless they are satisfied that they 
give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the Group 
and parent Company, and of the profit or loss of the Group 
and parent Company for that period. In preparing each of 
the Group and parent Company financial statements, the 
Directors are required to:
 • Select suitable accounting policies and apply  

them consistently  

 • Make judgements and accounting estimates  
that are reasonable, relevant and reliable
 • State whether the financial statements have  

been prepared in accordance with IFRS as adopted  
by the European Union

 • Assess the Group and parent Company’s ability to 

continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, 
matters related to going concern

 • Use the going concern basis of accounting unless 

they either intend to liquidate the Group or the parent 
Company or to cease operations, or have no realistic 

alternative but to do so

The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate 
accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain 
the parent Company’s transactions and disclose with 
reasonable accuracy at any time the financial position of the 
parent Company and enable them to ensure that its financial 
statements comply with the Companies Act 2006. They are 
responsible for such internal control as they determine is 
necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements 
that are free from material misstatement, whether due to 
fraud or error, and have general responsibility for taking  
such steps as are reasonably open to them to safeguard  
the assets of the Group and to prevent and detect fraud  
and other irregularities. 

Under applicable law and regulations, the Directors are also 
responsible for preparing a Strategic Report and a Directors’ 
Report that complies with that law and those regulations. 

The Directors are responsible for the maintenance  
and integrity of the corporate and financial information 
included on the Company’s website benchmarkplc.com.  
Legislation in the UK governing the preparation and 
dissemination of financial statements may differ from 
legislation in other jurisdictions.

Image: Dr Ernesto Dieguez and Rosana Estevez  
at our StofnFiskur facility in Kalmanstjørn, Iceland.

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Governance

107

03

FINANCIAL 
STATEMENTS

110 

Independent Auditor’s Report

114 

 Consolidated Income Statement

115 

 Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income

116  Consolidated Balance Sheet

117  Company Balance Sheet

118 

 Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity

119 

 Company Statement of Changes in Equity

120 

 Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows

121 

 Company Statement of Cash Flows

122 

 Notes Forming Part of the Financial Statements

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEME NTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATI ON

The services we provide have a 
fundamental impact on the development 
of sustainable aquaculture production 
and we are proud to serve the world’s 
largest players in the industry.

Morten Rye  
Managing Director  
Akvaforsk Genetics

109

INDEPENDENT 
AUDITOR’S REPORT

to the members of Benchmark Holdings plc

1   Our opinion is unmodified

Overview

Materiality:  
Group financial statements  
as a whole

£1,000,000 (2016: £750,000) 
0.7% (2016: 0.7%) of revenue

Coverage

86% (2016: 91%) of group revenue

Risks of material misstatement

vs 2016

Recurring risks

Valuation of goodwill, intangibles

Valuation of biological assets

Recoverability of parent  
company’s investment in  
subsidiaries and group  
debtor balances

We have audited the financial statements of 
Benchmark Holdings plc (“the Company”) for the year 
ended 30 September 2017 which comprise the 
Consolidated Income Statement, the Consolidated  
and Company Balance Sheets, the Consolidated 
Statement of Comprehensive Income, the Consolidated 
and Company Statement of Changes in Equity, the 
Consolidated and Company Statement of Cash 
Flows,and the related notes, including the accounting 
policies in note 1.

In our opinion:
 • the financial statements give a true and fair  

view of the state of the Group’s and of the parent 
Company’s affairs as at 30 September 2017 and  
of the Group’s loss for the year then ended;

 • the group financial statements have been properly 
prepared in accordance with International Financial 
Reporting Standards as adopted by the European 
Union (IFRSs as adopted by the EU);

 • the parent Company financial statements have  

been properly prepared in accordance with IFRSs  
as adopted by the EU and as applied in accordance 
with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006; and

 • the financial statements have been prepared in 

accordance with the requirements of the Companies 
Act 2006.

Basis for opinion

We conducted our audit in accordance with 
International Standards on Auditing (UK) (“ISAs  
(UK)”) and applicable law. Our responsibilities  
are described below. We have fulfilled our ethical 
responsibilities under, and are independent of the 
Group in accordance with, UK ethical requirements 
including the FRC Ethical Standard as applied to  
listed entities. We believe that the audit evidence  
we have obtained is a sufficient and appropriate  
basis for our opinion.

2  

 Key audit matters: our assessment of risks of material misstatement

Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgment, were of most significance in the audit of the 
financial statements and include the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due  
to fraud) identified by us, including those which had the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy; the allocation  
of resources in the audit; and directing the efforts of the engagement team. These matters were addressed in the 
context of our audit of the financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide  
a separate opinion on these matters. In arriving at our audit opinion above, the key audit matters, in decreasing order  
of audit significance, were as follows:

The risk

Our response

Valuation of group goodwill, acquired intangibles 
and of parent’s investment in subsidiaries/debt due 
from group entities 

Goodwill: £149,665,000 (2016: 152,905,000)

Intangibles: £175,695,000 (2016: £197,682,000)

Investments (parent company): £263,841,000 
(2016: £261,902,000)

Debt due from group entities (parent company):

£126,348,000 (2016: £101,122,000)

Refer to page 94 (Audit Committee Report), page 
126 (accounting policy) and page 144 (financial 
disclosures).

Forecast-based valuation:

The carrying value of goodwill, acquired intangibles, 
investments and debt due from group entities 
depends on assumptions of future financial 
performance which inherently contain an element 
of judgement and uncertainty. In addition, certain 
cash generating units of the group are at risk of 
impairment as they contain immature products 
or markets, or are not trading in line with initial 
expectations.

Significant areas of judgement include sales growth 
rates, operating margins and the discount rate 
applied to future cash flows.

Valuation of biological assets, Salmon broodstock

Subjective valuation:

Salmon broodstock: £9,273,000  
(2016: £7,584,000)

Refer to page 94 (Audit Committee Report),  
page 127 (accounting policy) and page 151 
(financial disclosures).

The group hold significant biological assets at 
StofnFiskur in Iceland. Under IFRS these are 
required to be held at fair value less cost to sell. 
The calculations of fair value include a number  
of assumptions relating to the future (e.g. egg 
sales prices, sales volumes), and are subject to 
seasonal variations.

Our procedures included:
 • Data comparisons: Assessing the Group’s 

impairment model for mathematical accuracy 
as well as internal consistency with board 
approved budgets and forecast;
 • Benchmarking assumptions: With the 

assistance of our valuation specialists we 
compared the Group’s assumptions in relation 
to key inputs such as projected growth and 
discount rates to externally derived data;
 • Sensitivity analysis: Performing analysis of 

changes in key assumptions such as projected 
growth and discount rates to understand the 
sensitivity of the valuation;

 • Historical comparison: Considering the Group’s 
historical budgeting accuracy, by assessing 
actual performance against budget;
 • Comparing valuations: Comparing the 

sum of the discounted cash flows to the 
group’s market capitalisation to assess the 
reasonableness of those cash flows; and
 • Assessing transparency: We also assessed 
whether the Group’s disclosures about the 
sensitivity of the outcome of the impairment 
assessment to changes in key assumptions 
reflected the risks inherent in the valuation  
of goodwill, intangibles and investments.

Our procedures included: 
 • Data comparisons: Assessing the Group’s 
valuation model for mathematical accuracy 
and internal consistency with board approved 
budgets and forecast;

 • Benchmarking assumptions: We compared the 
Group’s assumptions in relation to key inputs 
such as selling price to externally derived data;

 • Sensitivity analysis: Performing analysis of 

changes in key assumptions such as egg sales 
prices to understand the sensitivity of the 
valuation; and

 • Assessing transparency: We considered the 

adequacy of the Group’s disclosures in respect 
of the valuation of biological assets.

110

111

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsSTRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATION3  

 Our application of materiality and an 
overview of the scope of our audit

Revenue
£140,172,000 
(2016: £109,375,000)

Group Materiality 
£1,000,000 (2016: £750,000)

Materiality for the Group financial statements as  
a whole was set at £1,000,000 (2016: £750,000), 
determined with reference to a benchmark of Group 
revenue, of which it represents 0.7% (2016: 0.7% of 
Group revenue). We consider revenue to be the most 
appropriate benchmark as it provides a more stable 
measure year on year than group profit before tax.

Materiality for the parent company financial statements 
as a whole was set at £750,000 (2016: £650,000), 
determined with reference to a benchmark of company 
total assets, of which it represents 0.2% (2016: 0.2%). 

We agreed to report to the audit committee any 
corrected or uncorrected identified misstatements 
exceeding £50,000 (2016: £37,500), in addition  
to other identified misstatements that warranted 
reporting on qualitative grounds.

Of the Group’s 69 (2016: 45) reporting components, 
we subjected 19 (2016: 15) to full scope audits for 
Group purposes and 1 (2016: nil) was subject to 
specified risk-focused audit procedures over cost 
of sales and trade payables. The latter was not 
individually financially significant to require an audit 
for group reporting purposes but did present specific 
individual risks that need to be addressed. For the 
residual components, we performed analysis at an 
aggregated group level to re-examine our assessment 
that there were no significant risks of material 
misstatement within these.

The Group audit team instructed component auditors 
as to the significant areas to be covered, including the 
relevant risks detailed above and the information to 
be reported back. The Group audit team also approved 
the component materialities ranging from £10,000–
£750,000 (2016: £10,000–£650,000) having regard 
to the mix of size and risk profile of the Group across 
the components. The work on 10 of the 20 (2016: 4 
of the 15) components was performed by component 
auditors and the rest, including the audit of the parent 
company, by the Group team.

The Group team visited one component in Iceland  
and held calls with all other full scope component 
auditors to assess the audit risk and strategy as 
part of the planning process. During these, the audit 
approach to key risk areas were discussed.

The Group team visited three component locations 
in Iceland, Norway, and Belgium to attend clearance 
meetings and held calls with all other full scope 
component auditors. During these, the findings 
reported to the Group team were discussed in more 
detail, and any further work required by the Group  
team was then performed by the component auditor.

£1,000,000
Whole financial
statements materiality
(2016: £750,000)

£750,000
Range of materiality 
at 20 components 
(£10,000–£750,000)
(2016: £10,000–£650,000)

Revenue
Group Materiality

£50,000
Misstatements reported 
to the audit committee 
(2016: £37,500)

Group revenue

Group loss before tax

86%

(2016: 91%)

91

86

90%

(2016: 92%)

92

90

Group total assets

87%

(2016: 98%)

98

87

Full scope for group audit purposes 2017
Specified risk-focused audit procedures 2017
Full scope for group audit purposes 2016
Specified risk-focused audit procedures 2016
Residual components

4 

 We have nothing to report on going concern

7  Respective responsibilities

We are required to report to you if we have concluded 
that the use of the going concern basis of accounting 
is inappropriate or there is an undisclosed material 
uncertainty that may cast significant doubt over the 
use of that basis for a period of at least twelve months 
from the date of approval of the financial statements. 
We have nothing to report in these respects.

5 

 We have nothing to report on the other 
information in the Annual Report

The directors are responsible for the other information 
presented in the Annual Report together with the 
financial statements. Our opinion on the financial 
statements does not cover the other information and, 
accordingly, we do not express an audit opinion or, 
except as explicitly stated below, any form of assurance 
conclusion thereon. 

Our responsibility is to read the other information  
and, in doing so, consider whether, based on our 
financial statements audit work, the information  
therein is materially misstated or inconsistent with  
the financial statements or our audit knowledge.  
Based solely on that work we have not identified 
material misstatements in the other information. 

Strategic report and directors’ report 

Based solely on our work on the other information:
 • we have not identified material misstatements 
in the strategic report and the directors’ report; 

 • in our opinion the information given in those  

reports for the financial year is consistent with  
the financial statements; and 

 • in our opinion those reports have been prepared  
in accordance with the Companies Act 2006.

6 

 We have nothing to report on the  
other matters on which we are required  
to report by exception 

Under the Companies Act 2006, we are required  
to report to you if, in our opinion: 
 • adequate accounting records have not been  

kept by the parent Company, or returns adequate  
for our audit have not been received from branches 
not visited by us; or 

 • the parent Company financial statements are  
not in agreement with the accounting records  
and returns; or 

 • certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration 

specified by law are not made; or 

 • we have not received all the information and 

explanations we require for our audit. 

We have nothing to report in these respects.

Directors’ responsibilities 

As explained more fully in their statement set out 
on page 106, the directors are responsible for: the 
preparation of the financial statements including being 
satisfied that they give a true and fair view; such 
internal control as they determine is necessary to 
enable the preparation of financial statements that are 
free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud 
or error; assessing the Group and parent Company’s 
ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing, 
as applicable, matters related to going concern; and 
using the going concern basis of accounting unless 
they either intend to liquidate the Group or the parent 
Company or to cease operations, or have no realistic 
alternative but to do so.

Auditor’s responsibilities 

Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance 
about whether the financial statements as a whole are 
free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud 
or error, and to issue our opinion in an auditor’s report. 
Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, 
but does not guarantee that an audit conducted in 
accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a material 
misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise 
from fraud or error and are considered material if, 
individually or in aggregate, they could reasonably be 
expected to influence the economic decisions of users 
taken on the basis of the financial statements. 

A fuller description of our responsibilities  
is provided on the FRC’s website at  
frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. 

8 

 The purpose of our audit work and  
to whom we owe our responsibilities 

This report is made solely to the Company’s members, 
as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of 
the Companies Act 2006. Our audit work has been 
undertaken so that we might state to the Company’s 
members those matters we are required to state to 
them in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose. 
To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept 
or assume responsibility to anyone other than the 
Company and the Company’s members, as a body, for 
our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we 
have formed.

Ian Beaumont 
(Senior Statutory Auditor)  
for and on behalf of KPMG LLP, Statutory Auditor 

Chartered Accountants 
1 Sovereign Square, Sovereign Street, Leeds, LS1 4DA 
23 January 2018

112

113

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsSTRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONCONSOLIDATED  INCOME  STATEMENT
for the year ended 30 September 2017

CONSOLIDATED  STATEMENT  OF  COMPREHENSIVE  INCOME
for the year ended 30 September 2017

Loss for the year

Other comprehensive income

Items that are or may be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss

Movement on foreign exchange reserve

Total comprehensive income for the year

Total comprehensive income for the year attributable to:

— Owners of the parent

— Non-controlling interest

The accompanying notes form part of the financial statements.

2017
£000

2016
£000

(7,120)  

(18,346)  

(7,128)  

(14,248)  

48,386 

30,040 

(14,407)  

29,752 

159 

288 

(14,248)  

30,040 

Revenue

Cost of sales

Gross profit

Research and development costs

Other operating costs

Adjusted EBITDA²

Exceptional including acquisition related items

EBITDA¹

Depreciation

Amortisation

Operating loss

Finance cost

Finance income

Share of profit of equity-accounted investees, net of tax

Loss before taxation

Tax on loss

Loss for the year

Loss for the year attributable to:

— Owners of the parent

— Non-controlling interest

Basic loss per share (pence)

Diluted loss per share (pence)

Notes

2017
£000

2016
£000

4

140,172 

109,375 

(77,781)  

(58,562)  

62,391 

50,813 

(13,055)  

(11,720)  

(39,297)  

(29,865)  

10,039 

9,228 

5,649 

(13,091)  

15,688 

(4,877)  

(3,863)  

(2,859)  

(18,473)  

(13,749)  

(7,662)  

(20,471)  

(1,960)  

1,495 

27 

(6,170)  

3,984 

273 

(8,100)  

(22,384)  

10

13

14

9

9

11

980 

4,038 

(7,120)  

(18,346)  

(7,440)  

(18,337)  

320 

(9)  

(7,120)  

(18,346)  

(1.43)  

(1.43)  

(4.39)  

(4.39)  

12

12

1 EBITDA — Earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and amortisation

2 Adjusted EBITDA — EBITDA before exceptional and acquisition related items

The accompanying notes form part of the financial statements.

114

115

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsSTRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATION 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED  BALANCE  SHEET
as at 30 September 2017

COMPANY  BALANCE  SHEET
as at 30 September 2017

Assets

Non-current assets

Property, plant and equipment

Intangible assets

Equity-accounted investees

Other investments

Biological and agricultural assets

Total non-current assets

Current assets

Inventories

Biological and agricultural assets

Trade and other receivables

Cash and cash equivalents

Total current assets

Total assets

Liabilities

Current liabilities

Trade and other payables

Loans and borrowings

Corporation tax liability

Provisions

Total current liabilities

Non-current liabilities

Loans and borrowings

Other payables

Deferred tax

Total non-current liabilities

Total liabilities

Net assets

Issued capital and reserves attributable to owners of the parent

Share capital

Additional paid-in capital*

Capital redemption reserve

Retained earnings

Foreign exchange reserve

Equity attributable to owners of the parent

Non-controlling interest

Total equity and reserves

* See note 26

Notes

2017
£000

2016
£000

13

14

16

19

18

19

20

35

21

22

23

22

21

24

25

25

26

26

26

80,845 

50,023 

329,137 

352,538 

2,512

237

5,745 

581 

246

5,028 

418,476 

408,416 

20,053 

10,798 

38,530 

18,779 

23,231 

6,831 

34,288 

38,140 

88,160 

102,490 

506,636 

510,906 

(44,498)  

(31,232)  

(6,234)  

(2,844)  

(450)  

(289)  

(1,107)  

(1,086)  

(54,026)  

(33,714)  

(36,453)  

(37,407)  

(1,213)  

(8,825)  

(56,359)  

(63,261)  

(94,025)  

(109,493)  

(148,051)  

(143,207)  

358,585 

367,699 

522 

521 

339,431 

339,431 

5 

5 

(24,742)  

(18,904)  

38,398 

45,365 

353,614 

366,418 

27 

4,971 

1,281 

358,585 

367,699 

The financial statements on pages 114 to 170 were approved and authorised for issue by the Board of Directors on 
23 January 2018 and were signed on its behalf by:

M J Plampin 
Chief Financial Officer

The accompanying notes form part of the financial statements.

Assets

Non-current assets

Property, plant and equipment

Investments

Total non-current assets

Current assets

Trade and other receivables

Cash and cash equivalents

Total current assets

Total assets

Liabilities

Current liabilities

Trade and other payables

Total current liabilities

Non-current liabilities

Loans and borrowings

Total non-current liabilities

Total liabilities

Net assets

Issued capital and reserves attributable to owners of the parent

Share capital

Additional paid-in capital*

Capital redemption reserve

Retained earnings

Total equity and reserves

* See note 26

Note

2017
£000

2016
£000

13

17

20

35

287 

240 

263,841 

261,902 

264,128 

262,142 

126,843 

101,489 

1,776 

27,480 

128,619 

128,969 

392,747 

391,111 

21

(26,195)  

(26,102)  

(26,195)  

(26,102)  

22

(36,451)  

(37,193)  

(36,451)  

(37,193)  

(62,646)  

(63,295)  

330,101 

327,816 

25

25

26

26

522 

521 

339,431 

339,431 

5 

5 

(9,857)  

(12,141)  

330,101 

327,816 

The financial statements on pages 114 to 170 were approved and authorised for issue by the Board of Directors on 
23 January 2018 and were signed on its behalf by:

M J Plampin 
Chief Financial Officer

The accompanying notes form part of the financial statements.

116

117

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsSTRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATION 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED  STATEMENT  OF  CHANGES  IN  EQUITY
for the year ended 30 September 2017

COMPANY  STATEMENT  OF  CHANGES  IN  EQUITY
for the year ended 30 September 2017

At 1 October 2015

Comprehensive income for the year

Loss for the year

Total comprehensive income for the year

Contributions by and distributions to owners

Share based payment

Deferred tax on share options

Share issue

Share issue costs recognised through equity

Total contributions by and distributions to owners

At 30 September 2016

Comprehensive income for the year

Profit for the year

Total comprehensive income for the year

Contributions by and distributions to owners

Share based payment

Share issue

Total contributions by and distributions to owners

At 30 September 2017

* See note 26.

Share 
capital
£000

Additional 
paid-in 
capital*              
£000

Capital 
redemption 
reserve
£000

Retained 
earnings
£000

Total 
attributable 
to equity 
holders
£000

219 

94,672 

- 

- 

 - 

 - 

- 

- 

 - 

 - 

302 

249,444 

 - 

302 

521 

(4,685)  

244,759 

339,431 

- 

- 

- 

1 

1 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

5 

- 

- 

 - 

 - 

 - 

 - 

- 

5 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

1,799 

96,695 

(14,646)  

(14,646)  

(14,646)  

(14,646)  

749 

(43)  

 - 

 - 

749 

(43)  

249,746 

(4,685)  

706 

245,767 

(12,141)  

327,816 

682

682

682

682

1,602 

1,602 

1 

1,602 

1,603 

522 

339,431 

5 

(9,857)  

330,101 

The accompanying notes form part of the financial statements.

 Share  
capital 
 £000 

 Additional 
paid-in 
capital*       
 £000 

Other  
reserves 
 £000 

Retained 
 earnings 
 £000 

Total 
attributable 
 to equity 
holders of  
parent 
 £000 

Non- 
controlling 
interest 
 £000 

Total 
equity 
 £000 

As at 1 October 2015

219 

94,672 

(2,719)  

(1,021)  

91,151 

947 

92,098 

Comprehensive income for the period

Loss for the period

Other comprehensive income

Total comprehensive income for the 
period

Contributions by and distributions to 
owners

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

(18,337)  

(18,337)  

48,089 

- 

48,089 

48,089 

(18,337)  

29,752 

(9)  

297 

288 

(18,346)  

48,386 

30,040 

Share issue

302 

249,444 

Share issue costs recognised through 
equity

Share based payment

Deferred tax on share options

Total contributions by and distributions 
to owners

Changes in ownership

Acquisition of subsidiary with 
non-controlling interest

Total changes in ownership interests

Total transactions with owners of the 
Company

- 

- 

- 

(4,685)  

- 

- 

302 

244,759 

- 

- 

- 

- 

302 

244,759 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

249,746 

(4,685)  

749 

(295)  

749 

(295)  

454 

245,515 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

249,746 

(4,685)  

749 

(295)  

245,515 

- 

- 

- 

- 

454 

245,515 

46 

46 

46 

46 

46 

245,561 

As at 30 September 2016 

521 

339,431 

45,370 

(18,904)  

366,418 

1,281 

367,699 

Comprehensive income for the period

(Loss)/profit for the period

Other comprehensive income

Total comprehensive income for the 
period

Contributions by and distributions to 
owners

Share issue

Share based payment

Total contributions by and distributions 
to owners

Changes in ownership interests 

Investment in subsidiary by non-
controlling interest

Total changes in ownership interests

Total transactions with owners of the 
Company

- 

- 

- 

1 

- 

1 

- 

- 

1 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

(7,440)  

(6,967)  

- 

(7,440)  

(6,967)  

320 

(161)  

(7,120)  

(7,128)  

(6,967)  

(7,440)  

(14,407)  

159 

(14,248)  

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

1 

1,602 

1,602 

1,602 

1,603 

- 

- 

- 

1 

1,602 

1,603 

- 

- 

- 

- 

3,531 

3,531 

3,531 

3,531 

1,602 

1,603 

3,531 

5,134 

As at 30 September 2017

522 

339,431 

38,403 

(24,742)  

353,614 

4,971 

358,585 

* See note 26.

The accompanying notes form part of the financial statements.

118

119

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsSTRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATION 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED  STATEMENT  OF  CASH  FLOWS
for the year ended 30 September 2017

COMPANY  STATEMENT  OF  CASH  FLOWS
for the year ended 30 September 2017

Cash flows from operating activities

Loss for the year

Adjustments for:

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment

Amortisation of intangible fixed assets

Loss on sale of property, plant and equipment

Finance income

Finance costs

Share of profit of equity-accounted investees, net of tax

Foreign exchange (gains)/losses

Share based payment expense

Tax credit

Increase in trade and other receivables

Increase in inventories and biological assets

Increase/(decrease) in trade and other payables

Decrease in provisions

Income taxes paid

Notes

2017
£000

2016
£000

13

14

9

9

31

11

(7,120)  

(18,346)  

4,877 

2,859 

18,473 

13,749 

19 

(1,495)  

1,960 

(27)  

(1,434)  

1,602 

(980)  

15,875 

(1,250)  

(1,253)  

3,665 

(643)  

16,394 

(3,015)  

30 

(3,984)  

6,170 

(273)  

6,776 

749 

(4,038)  

3,692 

(3,729)  

(4,704)  

(4,124)  

(238)  

(9,103)  

(1,429)  

Cash flows from operating activities

Profit/(loss) for the year

Adjustments for:

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment

13

Finance income

Finance expense

Foreign exchange gains

Share based payment expense

Tax expense

Increase in trade and other receivables

(Decrease)/increase in trade and other payables

Net cash flows used in operating activities

Investing activities

Loans to subsidiary undertakings

Repayment of loan from subsidiary undertaking

Investment in subsidiary undertakings

Purchases of property, plant and equipment

Interest received

Net cash flows from/(used in) operating activities

13,379 

(10,532)  

Net cash received used in investing activities

Investing activities

Proceeds from investment by NCI

Acquisition of subsidiaries, net of cash acquired

Purchase of investments

Purchases of property, plant and equipment

Purchase of intangibles

Proceeds from sale of fixed assets

Interest received

Net cash flows used in investing activities

Financing activities

Proceeds of share issues

Proceeds from bank or other borrowings

Share-issue costs recognised through equity

Net cash flows from derivative financial instruments

Repayment of bank borrowings

Interest and finance charges paid

Payments to finance lease creditors

Net cash inflow from financing activities

Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

188 

- 

- 

(191,502)  

(2,032)  

- 

(32,740)  

(18,660)  

(2,423)  

(1,523)  

245 

270 

174 

254 

(36,492)  

(211,257)  

1 

216,519 

5,921 

42,254 

- 

- 

- 

(1,869)  

(301)  

(4,685)  

3,731 

(8,809)  

(2,481)  

(164)  

3,752 

246,365 

(19,361)  

38,140 

18,779 

24,576 

13,564 

38,140 

35

The accompanying notes form part of the financial statements.

Financing activities

Proceeds of share issue

Proceeds from bank borrowings

Share issue costs recognised through equity

Net cash flows from derivative financial instruments

Repayment of bank borrowings

Interest paid

Net cash (used in)/from financing activities

Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period

Cash and cash equivalents at end of period

The accompanying notes form part of the financial statements.

Note

2017
£000

2016
£000

682

(14,646)  

90 

(1,567)  

2,232 

(587)  

369 

325 

62 

(4,018)  

6,219 

- 

149 

127 

1,544

(12,107)  

(24,462)  

(34,001)  

(576)  

17,207 

(23,494)  

(28,901)  

(800)  

- 

-

(137)  

30 

- 

1,659 

(197,440)  

(148)  

288 

(907)  

(195,641)  

1 

216,519 

- 

- 

- 

- 

(1,304)  

42,254 

(4,685)  

3,731 

(8,809)  

(2,530)  

(1,303)  

246,480 

(25,704)  

21,938 

27,480 

5,542 

35

1,776 

27,480 

120

121

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsSTRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATION 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS
for the year ended 30 September 2017

NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

1  Accounting policies

Corporate information

Benchmark Holdings plc (the Company) is a public 
limited company, which is listed on the Alternative 
Investment Market (AIM), a sub-market of the London 
Stock Exchange. The Company is incorporated and 
domiciled in England and Wales. The registered office is 
at Benchmark House, 8 Smithy Wood Drive, Sheffield, 
S35 1QN.

The Group is principally engaged in the provision of 
technical services, products and specialist knowledge 
that support the global development of sustainable food 
and farming industries.

Basis of preparation

The principal accounting policies adopted in the 
preparation of the financial statements are set out 
below. The policies have been consistently applied to 
all the years presented, unless otherwise stated. The 
Group’s business activities, together with the factors 
likely to affect its future development, performance and 
position are set out in the Chairman’s Statement, the 
Strategic Report, the FY17 Financial Review and the 
Audit Committee Report. As at 30 September 2017 the 
Group had net assets of £358.6 million, including cash 
of £18.8 million (2016: £38.1 million) as set out in 
the consolidated balance sheet on page 116 and a five 
year revolving credit facility of US$70.0 million, of which 
US$50 million was drawn down at 30 September 2017 
and which expires in 2020.

The Directors have considered these factors, together 
with the results for the year and the likely future 
performance of the business and possible alternative 
outcomes and the financing activities available to 
the Group. Having taken all of these factors into 
consideration, including the impact on covenants 
relating to the external borrowing facility, the Directors 
confirm that forecasts and projections indicate that the 
Group and its Parent Company have adequate resources 
for the foreseeable future and at least for the period of 
12 months from the date of signing the annual report. 
Accordingly, the financial information has been prepared 
on the going concern basis.

These financial statements have been prepared in 
accordance with International Financial Reporting 
Standards, International Accounting Standards and 
Interpretations (collectively IFRSs) issued by the 
International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) as 
adopted by the European Union (“adopted IFRSs”) 
and those parts of the Companies Act 2006 that 
are applicable to companies that prepare financial 
statements in accordance with IFRS.

Following the growth and evolution of the Group and the 
acquisition of INVE Aquaculture in the prior year, the 
Directors consider the separation of the statutory IFRS 
results into Trading Activities and Investing Activities no 
longer to be appropriate, and a single column approach 
has been adopted. In this approach, in line with many 
of the Group’s peers in the sector, the Group highlights 
expensed research and development costs on the face 
of the consolidated income statement separate from 
other operating costs. Furthermore, the Group reports 
earnings before interest, depreciation and amortisation 
(“EBITDA”) and EBITDA before exceptional and 
acquisition related items (“Adjusted EBITDA”) to enable 

a better understanding of the investment being made in 
the Group’s future growth and provide a better measure 
of our underlying performance. This is how the Directors 
monitor the progress of the Group. 

The preparation of financial statements in compliance 
with adopted IFRS requires the use of certain 
critical accounting estimates. It also requires Group 
management to exercise judgement in applying the 
Group’s accounting policies. The areas where significant 
judgements and estimates have been made in preparing 
the financial statements and their effect are disclosed 
in note 2.

Basis of consolidation
The consolidated financial statements comprise the 
financial statements of the Group and its subsidiaries 
at 30 September 2017. Subsidiaries are consolidated 
from the date of acquisition, being the date on which 
the Group obtained control, and continue to be 
consolidated until the date when such control ceases.

Where the Company has power, either directly or 
indirectly, over another entity or business and the ability 
to use this power to affect the amount of returns, as 
well as exposure or rights to variable returns from 
its involvement with the investee, it is classified as 
a subsidiary. The consolidated financial statements 
present the results of the Company and its subsidiaries 
(“the Group”) as if they formed a single entity. 
Intercompany transactions, balances, unrealised gains 
and losses resulting from intra- Group transactions and 
dividends are eliminated in full.

The consolidated financial statements incorporate the 
results of business combinations using the acquisition 
method. In the consolidated balance sheet, the 
acquiree’s identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent 
liabilities are initially recognised at their fair values at 
the acquisition date.

Non-controlling interests, presented as part of equity, 
represent a proportion of a subsidiary’s profit or loss 
and net assets that is not held by the Group. The total 
comprehensive income or loss of non-wholly owned 
subsidiaries is attributed to owners of the parent and 
to the non-controlling interests in proportion to their 
respective ownership interests.

A separate income statement for the Company is not 
presented, in accordance with Section 408 of the 
Companies Act 2006. The profit for the year for the 
Company was £682,000 (2016: loss £14,646,000).

Standards issued but not effective

A number of new standards, amendments to standards 
and interpretations are not yet effective, and have not 
been applied in preparing these consolidated financial 
statements. Those which may be relevant to the Group 
are set out below. The adoption of these standards is 
not expected to have a material effect on the financial 
statements unless otherwise indicated:

IFRS 9 Financial Instruments: Classification and 
Measurement has been issued but is not yet effective. 
The standard has been developed in several phases 
and replaces IAS 39 Financial Instruments: Recognition 
and Measurement in its entirety. The effective date 
of the fully completed version of IFRS 9 is for periods 
beginning on or after 1 January 2018 with retrospective 
application. The Group has not yet quantified the full 
impact of all phases of the final standard. It is expected 
that the Group will adopt IRFS 9 on 1 October 2018.

1  Accounting policies (continued)

IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers, which 
has been issued but has an effective date of 1 January 
2018. IFRS 15 supersedes IAS 11 Construction 
Contracts, IAS 18 Revenue, IFRIC 13 Customer Loyalty 
Programmes, IFRIC 15 Agreements for the Construction 
of Real Estate, IFRIC 18 Transfers of Assets from 
Customers and SIC 31 Revenue —   Barter Transactions 
Involving Advertising Services. The Group has not yet 
quantified the potential impact of this standard. It is 
expected the Group will adopt IRFS 15 on 1 October 
2018.

IFRS 16 Leases introduces a single, on-balance 
sheet accounting model for lessees which has an 
effective date of 1 January 2019. The Group has not 
yet quantified the potential impact of this standard. 
It is expected that the Group will adopt IFRS 16 on 
1 October 2019.

New standards and interpretations applied for the first 
time

The following standards with an effective date of 
1 January 2016 have been adopted without any 
significant impact on the amounts reported in these 
financial statements:

Annual Improvements to IFRS 2012 — 2014 Cycle — 
various standards

Revenue

Revenue is recognised to the extent that it is probable 
that the economic benefits will flow to the Group and 
the revenue can be reliably measured, regardless 
of when the payment is being made. Revenue is 
measured at the fair value of consideration received 
or receivable, taking into account contractually defined 
terms of payment and excluding taxes or duty. The 
Group assesses its revenue arrangements against 
specific criteria in order to determine if it is acting as a 
principal or agent. The Group has concluded that it is 
acting as a principal in all of its revenue arrangements. 
The following specific criteria must also be met before 
revenue is recognised:

Sale of goods

Within Benchmark Animal Health, revenue from the sale 
of licenced veterinary vaccines and vaccine components 
is recognised when the Group has transferred the 
significant risks and rewards of ownership to the buyer, 
usually on despatch. Where the buyer has a right of 
return, revenue and cost of sales are adjusted for 
the value of the expected returns based on historical 
results, taking into consideration the specifics of each 
arrangement.

Within Benchmark Genetics, revenue from the sale of 
eggs is recognised upon despatch, which is when the 
risks and rewards of ownership are considered to have 
passed to the customer.

Within Benchmark Advanced Animal Nutrition, revenue 
of advanced nutrition and health products is recognised 
when the Group has transferred the significant risks and 
rewards of ownership to the buyer, usually on despatch.

Within Benchmark Sustainability Science, revenue from 
the sale of agricultural produce is recognised when the 
Group has transferred the significant risks and rewards 
of ownership to the buyer, usually on delivery. Where 
the buyer has a right of return, revenue and cost of 
sales are adjusted for the value of the expected returns 
based on historical results, taking into consideration the 
specifics of each arrangement.

Within Benchmark Technical Publishing, revenue from 
the sales of books and publications is recognised when 
the Group has transferred the significant risks and 
rewards of ownership to the buyer, usually on despatch.

Rendering of services

Services including sustainable food production 
consultancy, technical consultancy and assurance 
services are provided by Benchmark Sustainability 
Science, Benchmark Animal Health, Benchmark 
Genetics and Benchmark Advanced Animal Nutrition. 
Online news, marketing and technical publications, 
book publishing, online shops, online distance learning 
programs and other training courses are provided by 
Benchmark Technical Publishing.

Provided the amount of revenue can be measured 
reliably and it is probable that the Group will receive any 
consideration, revenue for these services is recognised 
in the period in which they are rendered.

Business combinations

Business combinations are accounted for using the 
acquisition method. The consideration transferred for 
the acquisition of a subsidiary is the fair values of the 
assets transferred, the liabilities incurred to the former 
owners of the acquiree and the equity interests issued 
by the Group. The consideration transferred includes the 
fair value of asset or liability resulting from a contingent 
consideration arrangement. Identifiable assets acquired 
and liabilities and contingent liabilities assumed in a 
business combination are measured initially at their fair 
values at the acquisition date. The Group recognises 
any non-controlling interest in the acquiree on an 
acquisition by acquisition basis, either at fair value or 
at the non-controlling interest’s proportionate share of 
the recognised amounts of acquiree’s identifiable net 
assets.

Transaction costs, other than share and debt issue 
costs, are expensed as incurred. In accordance with 
IFRS 3 — Business Combinations, the Group has 
a twelve-month period in which to finalise the fair 
values allocated to assets and liabilities determined 
provisionally on acquisition.

Contingent consideration is measured at fair value 
based on an estimate of the expected future payments. 
Deferred consideration is measured at the present 
value of the obligation.

If the business combination is achieved in stages, the 
previously held equity interest is remeasured at its 
acquisition date fair value and any resulting gain or loss 
is recognised in the consolidated income statement.

122

123

STRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsNOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

1  Accounting policies (continued)

Foreign currency

The Group’s consolidated financial statements are 
presented in UK pounds sterling, which is also the 
parent Company’s functional currency. The Group 
determines the functional currency of each of its 
subsidiaries and items included in the financial 
statements of each of those entities are measured 
using that functional currency.

Transactions entered into by Group entities in a currency 
other than the currency of the primary economic 
environment in which they operate (their “functional 
currency”) are recorded at the rates ruling when the 
transactions occur. Foreign currency monetary assets 
and liabilities are translated at the rates ruling at 
the reporting date. Exchange differences arising 
on the retranslation of unsettled monetary assets 
and liabilities are recognised immediately in the 
consolidated income statement.

On consolidation, the results of overseas operations 
are translated into sterling at rates approximating 
to those ruling when the transactions took place. All 
assets and liabilities of overseas operations, including 
goodwill arising on the acquisition of those operations, 
are translated at the rate ruling at the reporting date. 
Exchange differences arising on translating the opening 
net assets at opening rate and the results of overseas 
operations at actual rate are recognised in other 
comprehensive income and accumulated in the foreign 
exchange reserve.

Exchange differences recognised in the income 
statement in the Group entities’ separate financial 
statements on the translation of long-term monetary 
items forming part of the Group’s net investment in the 
overseas operation concerned are reclassified to other 
comprehensive income and accumulated in the foreign 
exchange reserve on consolidation.

On disposal of a foreign operation, the cumulative 
exchange differences recognised in the foreign 
exchange reserve relating to that operation up to the 
date of disposal are transferred to the consolidated 
income statement as part of the profit or loss on 
disposal.

Financial assets

The Group classifies all of its financial assets as 
loans and receivables and has not classified any of its 
financial assets as held to maturity.

Loans and receivable assets are non-derivative financial 
assets with fixed or determinable payments that are 
not quoted in an active market. They arise principally 
through the provision of goods and services to 
customers (e.g. trade receivables), but also incorporate 
other types of contractual monetary asset. They are 
initially recognised at fair value plus transaction costs 
that are directly attributable to their acquisition or issue, 
and are subsequently carried at amortised cost using 
the effective interest rate method, less provision for 
impairment.

Impairment provisions are recognised when there 
is objective evidence (such as significant financial 
difficulties on the part of the counterparty or default 
or significant delay in payment) that the Group will be 
unable to collect all of the amounts due under the 
terms of the receivable, the amount of such a provision 
being the difference between the net carrying amount 
and the present value of the future expected cash 
flows associated with the impaired receivable. For trade 
receivables, which are reported net, such provisions 
are recorded in a separate allowance account with the 
loss being recognised within operating costs in the 
consolidated income statement. On confirmation that 
the trade receivable will not be collectable, the gross 
carrying value of the asset is written off against the 
associated provision.

The Group’s loans and receivables comprise trade and 
other receivables and cash and cash equivalents in the 
consolidated balance sheet.

Cash and cash equivalents includes cash in hand, 
deposits held at call with banks, other short term highly 
liquid investments with original maturities of three 
months or less from inception, and for the purpose of 
the statements of cash flows, bank overdrafts. Bank 
overdrafts are shown within loans and borrowings in 
current liabilities on the consolidated balance sheet.

Financial liabilities

The Group classifies its financial liabilities as other 
financial liabilities which include the following items:
 • Bank borrowings which are initially recognised 

at fair value net of any transaction costs directly 
attributable to the issue of the instrument. Such 
interest bearing liabilities are subsequently 
measured at amortised cost using the effective 
interest rate method, which ensures that any 
interest expense over the period to repayment is at 
a constant rate on the balance of the liability carried 
in the consolidated balance sheet.

 • Trade payables and other short-term monetary 

liabilities, which are initially recognised at fair value 
and subsequently carried at amortised cost using 
the effective interest method.

Financial liabilities fair value through profit and loss

Contingent consideration is recognised at fair value 
with movements recognised in the consolidated income 
statement.

Share capital

The Group’s ordinary shares are classified as equity 
instruments.

Retirement benefits: Defined contribution schemes

Contributions to defined contribution pension schemes 
are charged to the income statement in the year to 
which they relate.

1  Accounting policies (continued)

Externally acquired intangible assets

Share-based payments

Where equity settled share options are awarded to 
employees, the fair value of the options at the date of 
grant is charged to the consolidated income statement 
over the vesting period. Non-market vesting conditions 
are taken into account by adjusting the number of equity 
instruments expected to vest at each reporting date so 
that, ultimately, the cumulative amount recognised over 
the vesting period is based on the number of options 
that eventually vest. Non-vesting conditions and market 
vesting conditions are factored into the fair value of the 
options granted. As long as all other vesting conditions 
are satisfied, a charge is made irrespective of whether 
the market vesting conditions are satisfied. The 
cumulative expense is not adjusted for failure to achieve 
a market vesting condition or where a non-vesting 
condition is not satisfied.

Where the terms and conditions of options are modified 
before they vest, the increase in the fair value of the 
options, measured immediately before and after the 
modification, is also charged to the consolidated income 
statement over the remaining vesting period.

Leased assets

Where substantially all of the risks and rewards 
incidental to ownership of a leased asset have been 
transferred to the Group (a “finance lease”), the asset 
is treated as if it had been purchased outright. The 
amount initially recognised as an asset is the lower of 
the fair value of the leased property and the present 
value of the minimum lease payments payable over the 
term of the lease. The corresponding lease commitment 
is shown as a liability. Lease payments are analysed 
between capital and interest. The interest element is 
charged to the consolidated income statement over 
the period of the lease and is calculated so that it 
represents a constant proportion of the lease liability. 
The capital element reduces the balance owed to the 
lessor.

Where substantially all of the risks and rewards 
incidental to ownership are not transferred to the Group 
(an “operating lease”), the total rentals payable under 
the lease are charged to the consolidated income 
statement on a straight-line basis over the lease term. 
The aggregate benefit of lease incentives is recognised 
as a reduction of the rental expense over the lease term 
on a straight-line basis.

Goodwill

Goodwill is initially measured at cost, being the excess 
of the cost of a business combination over the total 
acquisition date fair value of the identifiable assets, 
liabilities and contingent liabilities acquired. Goodwill is 
capitalised as an intangible asset with any impairment 
in carrying value being charged to the consolidated 
income statement. Where the fair value of identifiable 
assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities exceed the 
fair value of consideration paid, the excess is credited 
in full to the consolidated income statement on the 
acquisition date.

Externally acquired intangible assets are initially 
recognised at cost and subsequently amortised over 
their useful economic lives as outlined below, on a 
straight-line basis from the time they are available for 
use.

Intangible assets are recognised on business 
combinations if they are separable from the acquired 
entity or give rise to other contractual/legal rights. The 
amounts ascribed to such intangibles are arrived at by 
using appropriate valuation techniques (see section 
related to critical estimates and judgements below).

In-process research and development programmes 
acquired in such combinations are recognised as an 
asset, even if subsequent expenditure is written off 
because it does not meet the criteria specified in the 
policy for development costs below.

The significant intangibles recognised by the Group, 
their useful economic lives and the methods used to 
determine the cost of intangibles acquired in a business 
combination are as follows:

Intangible asset

Websites

Useful 
economic 
life

5 years 

Valuation method

Assessment of 
estimated revenues 
and profits

Patents

Trademarks

2-5 years

2-5 years

Cost to acquire

Cost to acquire

Contracts

3-20 years

Licences

3-20 years

Intellectual 
property

Up to  
20 years

Customer lists

Up to  
26 years

Genetic material 
and breeding 
nuclei

10-40 years

Assessment of 
estimated revenues 
and profits

Cost to acquire, or 
if not separately 
identifiable, 
assessment of 
estimated revenues 
and profits

Cost to acquire, or 
if not separately 
identifiable, 
assessment of 
estimated revenues 
and profits

Assessment of 
estimated revenues 
and profits

Cost to acquire, or 
if not separately 
identifiable, 
assessment of 
estimated revenues 
and profits

Development 
costs

Up to 10 years Cost to acquire

124

125

STRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsNOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

1  Accounting policies (continued)

Deferred taxation

1  Accounting policies (continued)

Government grants

Impairment of non-financial assets (excluding 
inventories)

The carrying values of all non-current assets are 
reviewed for impairment, either on a stand-alone basis 
or as part of a larger cash generating unit, when there 
is an indication that the assets might be impaired. 
Additionally, goodwill, intangible assets with indefinite 
useful lives and intangible assets which are not yet 
available for use are tested for impairment annually. 
Where the carrying value of an asset exceeds its 
recoverable amount (i.e. the higher of value in use and 
fair value less costs to sell), the asset is written down 
accordingly.

Where it is not possible to estimate the recoverable 
amount of an individual asset, the impairment test is 
carried out on the smallest group of assets to which it 
belongs for which there are separately identifiable cash 
flows; its cash generating units (‘CGUs’). Goodwill is 
allocated on initial recognition to each of the Group’s 
CGUs that are expected to benefit from the synergies of 
the combination giving rise to the goodwill.

Impairment charges are included in the consolidated 
income statement, except to the extent they reverse 
gains previously recognised in other comprehensive 
income. An impairment loss recognised for goodwill is 
not reversed.

Internally generated intangible assets (development 
costs)

Expenditure on internally developed products is 
capitalised if it can be demonstrated that:
 • it is technically feasible to develop the product for it 

to be sold;

 • adequate resources are available to complete the 

development;

 • there is an intention to complete and sell the 

product;

 • the Group is able to sell the product;
 • sale of the product will generate future economic 

benefits; and

 • expenditure on the project can be measured reliably.
Capitalised development costs are amortised over 
the periods the Group expects to benefit from selling 
the products developed. The amortisation expense is 
included within the cost of sales line in the consolidated 
income statement.

Development expenditure not satisfying the above 
criteria and expenditure on the research phase of 
internal projects are recognised in the consolidated 
income statement as incurred.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognised 
where the carrying amount of an asset or liability in 
the balance sheet differs from its tax base, except for 
differences arising on:
 • the initial recognition of goodwill;
 • the initial recognition of an asset or liability in a 
transaction which is not a business combination 
and at the time of the transaction affects neither 
accounting or taxable profit; and

 • investments in subsidiaries and jointly controlled 

entities where the Group is able to control the timing 
of the reversal of the difference and it is probable 
that the difference will not reverse in the foreseeable 
future.

Recognition of deferred tax assets is restricted to those 
instances where it is probable that taxable profit will be 
available against which the difference can be utilised. 
The carrying amount of deferred tax asset is reviewed at 
each balance sheet date and reduced to the extent that 
it is no longer probable that sufficient taxable profits 
will be available to allow all or part of the asset to be 
recovered.

The amount of the asset or liability is determined using 
tax rates that have been enacted or substantively 
enacted by the reporting date and are expected to apply 
when the deferred tax liabilities/assets are settled/
recovered.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset when the 
Group has a legally enforceable right to offset current 
tax assets and liabilities and the deferred tax assets 
and liabilities relate to taxes levied by the same tax 
authority on either:
 • the same taxable Group company; or
 • different Group entities which intend either to settle 
current tax assets and liabilities on a net basis, 
or to realise the assets and settle the liabilities 
simultaneously, in each future period in which 
significant amounts of deferred tax assets or 
liabilities are expected to be settled or recovered.

Property, plant and equipment

Items of property, plant and equipment are initially 
recognised at cost. As well as the purchase price, cost 
includes directly attributable costs and the estimated 
present value of any future unavoidable costs of 
dismantling and removing items. The corresponding 
liability is recognised within provisions.

Freehold land is not depreciated. Assets in the course 
of construction which have not yet been brought into 
use are not depreciated until fully commissioned and 
available for use. Depreciation is provided on all other 
items of property, plant and equipment so as to write off 
their carrying value over their expected useful economic 
lives. It is provided at the following rates:

Freehold property

– 2% per annum straight line

Long term 
leasehold property 
improvements

– 2% — 10% per annum 

straight line

Plant and machinery – 15% per annum 
reducing balance

Motor vehicles

E commerce 
infrastructure

– 25% per annum 
reducing balance

– 10% per annum straight line

Other fixed assets

– 15% — 33% per annum 

straight line

Inventories

Inventories are initially recognised at cost, and 
subsequently at the lower of cost and net realisable 
value. Cost comprises all costs of purchase, costs of 
conversion and other costs incurred in bringing the 
inventories to their present location and condition.

Biological assets

Biological assets comprise two asset types: livestock, 
and fish, fish eggs and frozen milt.

Livestock is measured at fair value less costs to sell. 
The fair value of livestock is based on quoted prices of 
livestock and adjusted for age, breed, and genetic merit 
in the principal (or most advantageous) market for the 
livestock, and therefore is categorised within level 2 of 
the fair value hierarchy set out in IFRS 13.

Fish, fish eggs and frozen milt are, in accordance with 
IAS 41 ‘Agriculture’, measured at fair value, unless the 
fair value cannot be measured reliably. The principal 
components of fish, fish eggs and frozen milt within the 
business are:
 • Salmon broodstock
 • Salmon fingerlings
 • Salmon eggs
 • Lumpfish eggs and fingerlings
 • Tilapia broodstock and fingerlings
 • Frozen milt
Non-current biological assets are those biological 
assets which will not produce saleable progeny within 
twelve months of the balance sheet date. Further 
details of the valuation of fish, fish eggs and frozen milt 
are given in note 19.

Government grants received on capital expenditure 
are included in the balance sheet as deferred income 
and released to the income statement over the life of 
the asset. Grants for revenue expenditure are netted 
against the cost incurred by the Group. Where retention 
of a government grant is dependent on the Group 
satisfying certain criteria, it is initially recognised as 
deferred income. When the criteria for retention have 
been satisfied, the deferred income balance is released 
to the consolidated income statement or netted against 
the asset purchased.

Provisions

The Group has recognised provisions for liabilities 
of uncertain timing or amount including those for 
leasehold dilapidations, sale or return obligations and 
legal disputes. The provision is measured at the best 
estimate of the expenditure required to settle the 
obligation at the reporting date, discounted at a pre-tax 
rate reflecting current market assessments of the time 
value of money and risks specific to the liability. In the 
case of leasehold dilapidations, the provision takes into 
account the potential that the properties in question 
may be sublet for some or all of the remaining lease 
term.

Investments in subsidiary undertakings

Investments in subsidiaries are stated at cost less 
provision for impairment.

Investments in associates

An associate is an entity over which the Group has 
significant influence and that is neither a subsidiary nor 
an interest in a joint venture. Significant influence is 
the power to participate in the financial and operating 
policy decisions of the investee but is not control or joint 
control over those policies.

The results and assets and liabilities of associates are 
incorporated in the consolidated financial statements 
using the equity method of accounting. Under the equity 
method, investments in associates are carried in the 
consolidated balance sheet at cost as adjusted for 
post-acquisition changes in the Group’s share of the 
net assets of the associate, less any impairment in 
the value of the investment. Losses of an associate in 
excess of the Group’s interest in that associate are not 
recognised. Additional losses are provided for, and a 
liability is recognised, only to the extent that the Group 
has incurred legal or constructive obligations or made 
payments on behalf of the associate.

Any excess of the cost of acquisition over the Group’s 
share of the net fair value of the identifiable assets, 
liabilities and contingent liabilities of the associate 
recognised at the date of acquisition is recognised as 
goodwill. The goodwill is included within the carrying 
amount of the investment.

126

127

STRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsNOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

1  Accounting policies (continued)

Cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash balances 
and call deposits with an original maturity of three 
months or less. Bank overdrafts that are repayable on 
demand and form an integral part of the Group’s cash 
management are included as a component of cash and 
cash equivalents for the purpose of the statements of 
cash flows.

Dividends

Dividends are recognised when they become legally 
payable. In the case of interim dividends to equity 
shareholders, this is when declared by the Directors. In 
the case of final dividends, this is when approved by the 
shareholders at the AGM.

2 

 Critical accounting estimates and 
judgements

The Group makes certain estimates and assumptions 
regarding the future. Estimates and judgements are 
continually evaluated based on historical experience 
and other factors, including expectations of future 
events that are believed to be reasonable under the 
circumstances. In the future, actual experience may 
differ from these estimates and assumptions. The 
estimates and assumptions that have a significant 
risk of causing a material adjustment to the carrying 
amounts of assets and liabilities within the next 
financial year are discussed below.

Estimates

(a) Fair value measurement

A number of assets and liabilities included in the 
Group’s financial statements require measurement at, 
and/or disclosure of, fair value.

The fair value measurement of the Group’s financial 
and non-financial assets and liabilities utilises market 
observable inputs and data as far as possible. 
Inputs used in determining fair value measurements 
are categorised into different levels based on how 
observable the inputs used in the valuation technique 
utilised are (the ‘fair value hierarchy’):

Level 1: Quoted prices in active markets for identical 
items (unadjusted)

Level 2: Observable direct or indirect inputs other than 
Level 1 inputs

Level 3: Unobservable inputs (i.e. not derived from 
market data).

The classification of an item into the above levels is 
based on the lowest level of the inputs used that has a 
significant effect on the fair value measurement of the 
item. Transfers of items between levels are recognised 
in the period they occur

The Group measures the following items at fair value.

Biological assets (note 19)

Contingent consideration outstanding from past 
acquisitions (note 21).

For more detailed information in relation to the fair value 
measurement of the items above, please refer to the 
applicable notes.

(b) Impairment of goodwill

The Group is required to test, on an annual basis, 
whether goodwill has suffered any impairment. The 
recoverable amount is determined based on value in 
use calculations. The use of this method requires the 
estimation of future cash flows and the choice of a 
discount rate in order to calculate the present value 
of the cash flows. More information including carrying 
values is included in note 15.

Judgements

(a) Capitalisation of development costs

Costs incurred on Internally developed products are 
capitalised in line with the Group’s accounting policy, 
and significant judgement is required in determining at 
which point the appropriate criteria for capitalisation 
have been met. This involves determination of 
factors such as the point when the technical 
feasibility has been established and the likelihood of 
commercialisation of the product.

(b) Recognition of deferred tax

Deferred tax is provided in full on temporary differences 
under the liability method using substantively 
enacted rates to the extent that they are expected to 
reverse. Provision is made in full where the temporary 
differences result in liabilities, but deferred tax assets 
are only recognised where the directors believe it is 
probably that the assets will be recovered. Judgement 
is required to determine the likelihood of reversal of the 
temporary differences in establishing whether an asset 
should be recognised.

(c)  Valuation of intangible assets

Where the cost of intangible assets acquired as part 
of business combinations is not separately identifiable 
or does not represent the fair value, the valuation is 
calculated based upon value in use which requires the 
use of a discount rate in order to calculate the present 
value of cash flows. These intangibles are reviewed 
annually for impairment. The recoverable amount is 
determined based on value in use calculations.  The 
use of this method requires the estimation of future 
cash flows and the choice of a discount rate in order 
to calculate the present value of the cash flows. The 
assumptions used in the assessment of the recoverable 
amount are consistent with those used in the 
impairment review for goodwill as outlined in note 15.

3  Financial instruments — Risk Management

The Group is exposed through its operations to the following financial risks:
 • Credit risk
 • Fair value or cash flow interest rate risk
 • Foreign exchange risk
 • Liquidity risk
In common with all other businesses, the Group is exposed to risks that arise from its use of financial instruments. This 
note describes the Group’s objectives, policies and processes for managing those risks and the methods used to measure 
them. Further quantitative information in respect of these risks is presented throughout these financial statements. 
There have been no substantive changes in the Group’s exposure to financial instrument risks, its objectives, policies and 
processes for managing those risks or the methods used to measure them from previous periods unless otherwise stated 
in this note.

Principal financial instruments

The principal financial instruments used by the Group, from which financial instrument risk arises, are as follows:
 • Trade receivables
 • Cash and cash equivalents
 • Trade and other payables
 • Bank overdrafts
 • Floating-rate bank loans
 • Contingent consideration
The contingent consideration held within other payables is classified as financial liabilities at fair value through profit and 
loss. In accordance with IFRS 13 ‘Fair Value Measurement’, the measurement of the fair value of contingent consideration 
is categorised into Level 3 in the fair value hierarchy, as the inputs are primarily unobservable. The amounts payable 
for all of the outstanding amounts depend on sales volumes or sales revenues targets. Management uses the actual 
performance against these targets together with relevant budgets and forecasts to derive the fair value of the contingent 
consideration. Where the level of contingent consideration payable is known with a reasonable level of certainty, as the 
underlying performance against target levels is well established, the contingent consideration is adjusted accordingly. This 
has resulted in an income statement credit in the period as shown in note 10. The contingent consideration for Akvaforsk 
Genetic Center Inc is dependent on a longer-term target and is recorded in these financial statements at management’s 
best estimate. An increased level of performance for Akvaforsk Genetic Center Inc would increase the amount payable. A 
reduction in the level of performance would significantly reduce the amounts payable.

A summary of the financial instruments held by category is provided below:

Group

Financial assets

Financial assets measured at amortised cost

Cash and cash equivalents (note 35)

Trade and other receivables (note 20)

Total financial assets

Financial liabilities

Financial liabilities measured at amortised cost

Trade and other payables (note 21)

Loans and borrowings (note 22)

Financial liabilities at fair value through profit and loss

Other payables — contingent consideration (note 21)

Total financial liabilities

2017
£000

18,779 

30,074 

48,853 

2017
£000

37,850 

42,687 

80,537

1,222

81,759 

2016
£000

38,140 

30,003 

68,143 

2016
£000

27,682 

37,696 

65,378

8,806

74,184 

128

129

STRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial Statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

3 

 Financial instruments — Risk Management (continued)

3 

 Financial instruments — Risk Management (continued)

Foreign exchange risk

Foreign exchange risk arises when individual Group entities enter into transactions denominated in a currency other than 
their functional currency (principally Sterling, Norwegian Krone, Icelandic Krona, Euro, US dollars and Danish Krone). The 
Group’s policy is, where possible, to allow Group entities to settle liabilities denominated in their functional currency with 
the cash generated from their own operations in that currency. Where Group entities have liabilities denominated in a 
currency other than their functional currency (and have insufficient reserves of that currency to settle them), cash already 
denominated in that currency will, where possible, be transferred from elsewhere within the Group.

The table below shows the impact of a 10 per cent increase and reduction in Sterling against the relevant foreign 
currencies, with all other variables held constant, on the Group’s profit before tax and equity. A greater or smaller change 
would have a pro-rata effect. The movements in profit arise from retranslation of foreign currency denominated monetary 
items held at the year end, including the foreign currency revolving credit facility, foreign currency bank accounts, trade 
receivables, trade and other payables. The movements in equity arise from the retranslation of the net assets of overseas 
subsidiaries and the intangible assets arising on consolidation in accordance with IFRS 10 Consolidated Financial 
Statements.

£/$

£/€

£/NOK

£/ISK

£/THB

Increase/(decrease) 

Profit
£000

Equity
£000

Profit
£000

Equity
£000

Profit
£000

Equity
£000

Profit
£000

Equity
£000

Profit
£000

2017 10% increase in rate

3,213 

(17,949)  

(186)   

(1,735)  

115 

(3,480)  

427 

(2,888)  

2017 10% reduction in rate

(3,927)  

21,938 

2016 10% increase in rate

3,214 

(20,545)  

227 

174 

2,121 

(140)  

4,253 

(521)  

3,530 

(554)  

359 

(2,659)  

412 

(2,518)  

2016 10% reduction in rate

(3,928)  

25,110 

(213)  

677 

(439)  

3,250 

(504)  

3,077 

- 

- 

- 

- 

Equity
£000

(961)  

1,174 

(854)  

1,043 

Liquidity risk

Liquidity risk arises from the Group’s management of working capital and the finance charges and principal repayments 
on its debt instruments. It is the risk that the Group will encounter difficulty in meeting its financial obligations as they fall 
due.

The Group’s policy is to ensure that it will always have sufficient cash to allow it to meet its liabilities when they become 
due. To achieve this aim, the Group seeks to maintain cash balances (or agreed facilities) sufficient to meet expected 
requirements detailed in rolling three month cashflow forecasts, and in longer term cashflow forecasts.

Company

Financial assets

Financial assets measured at amortised cost

Cash and cash equivalents (note 35)

Trade and other receivables (note 20)

Total financial assets

Financial liabilities

Financial liabilities measured at amortised cost

Trade and other payables (note 21)

Loans and borrowings (note 22)

Financial liabilities at fair value through profit and loss

Other payables — contingent consideration (note 21)

Total financial liabilities

There were no financial instruments classified as available for sale.

General objectives, policies and processes

2017
£000

1,776 

126,843 

128,619 

2017
£000

25,772 

36,451 

62,223 

84 

62,307 

2016
£000

27,480 

101,122 

128,602 

2016
£000

25,916 

37,193 

63,109 

82 

63,191 

The Board has overall responsibility for the determination of the Group’s risk management objectives and policies and, 
whilst retaining ultimate responsibility for them, it has delegated the authority for designing and operating processes that 
ensure the effective implementation of the objectives and policies to the Group’s finance function.

The Board receives monthly reports from the Group Chief Financial Officer through which it reviews the effectiveness of the 
processes put in place and the appropriateness of the objectives and policies it sets.

The overall objective of the Board is to set policies that seek to reduce risk as far as possible without unduly affecting the 
Group’s competitiveness and flexibility. Further details regarding these policies are set out below:

Credit risk

Credit risk is the risk of financial loss to the Group if a customer or counterparty to a financial instrument fails to meet its 
contractual obligations. The Group is mainly exposed to credit risk from credit sales. It is Group policy, implemented locally, 
to assess the credit risk of new customers before entering contracts.

Credit risk also arises from cash and cash equivalents and deposits with banks and financial institutions. For banks and 
financial institutions, only independently rated parties with minimum rating “A” are accepted.

Further disclosures regarding trade and other receivables are provided in note 20.

Fair value and cash flow interest rate risk

During the year the Group had borrowings denominated in Sterling, US Dollars and Norwegian Krone, if interest rates on 
Pound Sterling and US Dollar denominated borrowings had been 100 basis points higher/lower with all other variables 
held constant, loss after tax for the year ended 30 September 2017 would be £454,000 higher/lower (2016: £434,000 
higher/lower). The Directors consider that 100 basis points is the maximum likely change in the relevant interest rates 
over the next year, being the period up to the next point at which the Group expects to make these disclosures.

130

131

STRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial Statements 
 
 
NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

3 

 Financial instruments — Risk Management (continued)

The following table sets out the contractual maturities (representing undiscounted contractual cash-flows) of financial 
liabilities:

Group

As at September 2017

Trade and other 
payables

Loans and borrowings

Total

As at September 2016

Trade and other 
payables

Loans and borrowings

Total

Company

As at September 2017

Trade and other 
payables

Loans and borrowings

Total

As at September 2016

Trade and other 
payables

Loans and borrowings

Total

Capital Management

Up to 
3 months
£000

34,803 

6,411 

41,214 

Up to 
3 months
£000

26,613 

416 

27,029 

Up to 
3 months
£000

25,615 

328 

25,943 

Up to 
3 months
£000

25,916 

326 

26,242 

Between 
3 and 
12 months
£000

3,332 

1,146 

4,478 

Between 
3 and 
12 months
£000

1,051 

1,232 

2,283 

Between 
3 and 
12 months
£000

241 

984 

1,225 

Between 
3 and 
12 months
£000

82 

966 

1,048 

Between 
1 and 2 years
£000

Between 
2 and 5 years
£000

- 

1,314 

1,314 

937 

38,091 

39,028 

Between 
1 and 2 years
£000

Between 
2 and 5 years
£000

7,862 

1,438 

9,300 

962 

40,042 

41,004 

Between 
1 and 2 years
£000

Between 
2 and 5 years
£000

- 

1,312 

1,312 

- 

38,091 

38,091 

Between 
1 and 2 years
£000

Between 
2 and 5 years
£000

- 

1,292 

1,292 

- 

40,042 

40,042 

Over 
5 years
£000

- 

60 

60 

Over 
5 years
£000

- 

60 

60 

Over 
5 years
£000

- 

60 

60 

Over 
5 years
£000

- 

60 

60 

The capital structure of the Group consists of debt, as analysed in Note 22, and equity attributable to the equity holders 
of the Parent Company, comprising share capital, share premium, merger reserve, capital redemption reserve, foreign 
exchange reserve, retained earnings, and share based payment reserve, and non-controlling interest as shown in the 
Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity. The Group manages its capital with the objective that all entities within the 
Group continue as going concerns while maintaining an efficient structure to minimise the cost of capital and ensuring 
that the Group complies with the banking covenants associated with the external borrowing facilities. These covenants are 
related to interest cover and leverage. The Group is not restricted by any externally imposed capital requirements.

4  Revenue

Revenue arises from:

Sale of goods

Provision of services

5  Expenses by nature

Changes in inventories of finished goods and work in progress

Changes in biological assets

Write-down of inventory to net realisable value

Course fees

Raw materials and consumables used

Transportation expenses

Staff costs (see note 7)

Motor, travel and entertainment

Premises costs

Advertising and marketing

Professional fees

Foreign exchange gains

Losses on disposal of property, plant and equipment

Exceptional items (see note 10)

Other research and development costs

Depreciation of PPE

Amortisation of intangible assets

Other costs

2017
£000

122,513 

17,659 

140,172 

2017
£000

4,788 

(4,413)  

1,414 

2,871 

56,288 

3,306 

37,183 

4,580 

8,169 

1,909 

4,846 

(136)  

18 

(5,649)  

5,180 

4,877 

18,473

4,130

2016
£000

94,751 

14,624 

109,375 

2016
£000

1,186 

(928)  

686 

2,648 

43,634 

1,137 

26,499 

3,093 

6,516 

1,690 

4,563 

(1,674)  

30 

13,091 

7,702 

2,859 

13,749 

3,365 

Total cost of sales, operating costs, depreciation and amortisation

147,834 

129,846 

132

133

STRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial Statements 
 
 
 
NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

6  Auditor’s remuneration

Audit of these financial statements

Amounts receivable by auditors and their associates in respect of:

Audit of financial statements of subsidiaries pursuant to legislation

Audit related assurance services

Services relating to taxation

Due diligence

2017
£000

66 

304 

24 

- 

13 

407 

2016
£000

64 

249 

23 

3 

907 

1,246 

The 2016 fees for the services relating to taxation and the due diligence were performed by the Company’s previous 
auditor, BDO LLP. The remainder of the fees for 2016 were due to KPMG LLP, who were appointed during that year.

7  Staff costs

Staff costs (including Directors) comprise:

Wages and salaries

Social security contributions and similar taxes

Defined contribution pension cost

Share-based payment expense (note 31)

The average monthly number of employees, including Directors, 
during the year was as follows:

Production

Administration

Management

2017
£000

30,992 

2,946 

1,643 

1,602 

37,183 

2017
No.

636 

138 

107 

881 

2016
£000

22,741 

1,930 

1,079 

749 

26,499 

2016
No.

500 

105 

98 

703 

7  Staff costs (continued)

Directors’ remuneration

Salary
£000

Bonus
£000

Taxable 
benefits
£000

Long-term 
incentive
£000

Pension
£000

Fees
£000

2017
£000

2016
£000

244 

230 

283 

- 

- 

- 

- 

757 

1 

1 

1 

- 

- 

- 

- 

3 

2 

3 

6 

- 

-

-

- 

11 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

24 

16 

28 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

45 

45 

38 

- 

271 

250 

318 

45 

45 

38 

- 

288 

269 

318 

45

43 

- 

35 

68 

128 

967 

998 

Roland 
Bonney 

Mark Plampin

Malcolm Pye 

Alex Hambro

Susan Searle

Kevin Quinn

Basil Brookes

Total

Of the 2016 total of £998,000, £954,000 was emoluments and £44,000 related to pension and other post-employment 
benefit costs.

During the year retirement benefits were accruing to 3 Directors (2016: 3) in respect of defined contribution pension 
schemes. The cost of employer National Insurance contributions in relation to the Directors was £119,000 (2016: 
£146,000).

The value of the Group’s contributions paid to a defined contribution pension scheme in respect of the highest paid 
Director amounted to £28,000 (2016: £17,000).

In addition to the above, there was an accounting charge for share based payments in respect of the Directors for  
£81,000 (2016: £35,000). The aggregate gain on the exercise of options by the Directors during the year was £106,000 
(2016: £nil).

Directors’ interests under the Company’s employee share plans

Director

Mark Plampin

Share 
option 
scheme

EMI 
scheme

Options 
held at 30 
September 
2016

Options 
exercised 
in year

Options 
granted 
in year

135,000 

(135,000)

-

-

Options 
held at 
30 
September 
2017

-

Exercise 
price

0.1p

67,647 

0.1p

Mark Plampin

CSOP II

67,647 

Mark Plampin

CSOP II

- 

-

- 

56,398 

56,398 

0.1p

Date from 
which 
exercisable

Grant date

29 August 
2013

29 August 
2016

9 March 
2015

6 March 
2017

8 March 
2018

5 March 
2020

In addition to the cash bonus, Malcolm Pye will receive 500,000 options, Mark Plampin will receive 400,000 options and 
Roland Bonney will receive 100,000 options, with an exercise price equal to market value of the Benchmark shares on the 
date of grant.

Further details of Directors’ remuneration are provided in the Remuneration Report on pages 97 to 101.

The key management of the Group is deemed to be the Board of Directors who have authority and responsibility for 
planning and controlling all significant activities of the Group.

134

135

STRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial Statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

8  Segment information

Operating segments are reported in a manner consistent with the reports made to the chief operating decision maker. It is 
considered that the role of chief operating decision maker is performed by the Board of Directors.

The Group operates globally and for management purposes is organised into reportable segments as follows:
 • Animal Health Division — provides veterinary services, environmental services diagnostics and animal health products 

to global aquaculture, and manufactures licenced veterinary vaccines and vaccine components;

 • Genetics Division — harnesses industry leading salmon breeding technologies combined with state-of-the-art 

production facilities to provide a range of year-round high genetic merit ova;

 • Advanced Animal Nutrition — manufactures and provides technically advanced nutrition and health products to the 

global aquaculture industry;

 • Corporate — the corporate segment represents revenues earned from recharging certain central costs to the 

operating divisions, together with unallocated central costs.

In addition to the above, reported together as “all other segments” are the following divisions (known collectively as 
“Knowledge Services”), the results of which are not significant on an individual basis:
 • Sustainability Science Division — provides sustainable food production consultancy, technical consultancy and 

assurance services;

 • Technical Publishing Division — promotes sustainable food production and ethics through online news and technical 
publications for the international agriculture and food processing sectors and through delivery of training courses to 
the industries.

Measurement of operating segment profit or loss

Inter-segment sales are priced along the same lines as sales to external customers, with an appropriate discount 
being applied to encourage use of Group resources at a rate acceptable to local tax authorities. This policy was applied 
consistently throughout the current and prior period.

Year ended 30 September 2017

 Animal 
Health 
 £000 

 Genetics 
 £000 

 Notes 

Advanced 
Animal 
Nutrition 
 £000 

 All other 
segments 
 £000 

 Corporate 
 £000 

 Inter-
segment 
sales 
 £000 

 Total 
 £000 

15,149 

30,530 

83,659 

13,770 

4,300 

(7,236)  

140,172 

(13,882)  

(13,842)  

(42,789)  

(9,405)  

(359)  

2,496 

(77,781)  

1,267 

16,688 

40,870 

4,365 

3,941 

(4,740)  

62,391 

(7,343)  

(2,682)  

(3,030)  

- 

- 

- 

(13,055)  

(5,527)  

(8,221)  

(20,159)  

(5,240)  

(4,890)  

4,740 

(39,297)  

(11,603)  

5,785 

17,681 

(875)  

(949)  

10 

(631)  

7,005 

(19)  

(51)  

(655)  

(12,234)  

12,790 

17,662 

(926)  

(1,604)  

(851)  

(523)  

(1,217)  

(1,630)  

(1,053)  

(126)  

(2,113)  

(14,950)  

(887)  

- 

Revenue 

Cost of sales 

Gross profit / (loss) 

Research and 
development costs 

Operating costs 

Adjusted EBITDA 

Exceptional including 
acquisition related items 

EBITDA 

Depreciation 

Amortisation 

Operating profit / (loss) 

(13,608)  

9,460 

1,082

(2,866)  

(1,730)  

Finance cost 

Finance income 

Share of profit of equity-
accounted investees, net 
of tax 

Loss before tax 

- 

- 

-

- 

- 

- 

10,039 

5,649 

15,688 

(4,877)  

(18,473)  

(7,662)  

(1,960)  

1,495 

27 

(8,100)  

8  Segment information (continued)

Year ended 30 September 2016

 Animal 
Health 
 £000 

 Genetics 
 £000 

 Notes 

Advanced 
Animal 
Nutrition 
 £000 

 All other 
segments 
 £000 

 Corporate 
 £000 

 Inter-
segment 
sales 
 £000 

 Total 
 £000 

24,837 

20,717 

55,024 

11,195 

3,002 

(5,400)  

109,375 

(15,035)  

(13,523)  

(26,517)  

(6,985)  

(938)  

4,436 

(58,562)  

9,802 

7,194 

28,507 

4,210 

2,064 

(964)  

50,813 

(8,258)  

(2,195)  

(1,341)  

- 

- 

74 

(11,720)  

(5,766)  

(3,614)  

(11,302)  

(5,599)  

(4,317)  

733 

(29,865)  

(4,222)  

1,385 

15,864 

(1,389)  

(2,253)  

(157)  

9,228 

10 

(257)  

(2,387)  

2 

(146)  

(10,317)  

14 

(13,091)  

(4,479)  

(1,002)  

15,866 

(1,535)  

(12,570)  

(143)  

(3,863)  

(721)  

(792)  

(796)  

(1,016)  

(1,850)  

(10,369)  

(271)  

(738)  

(55)  

- 

- 

- 

(2,859)  

(13,749)  

Revenue 

Cost of sales 

Gross profit / (loss) 

Research and 
development costs 

Operating costs 

Adjusted EBITDA 

Exceptional including 
acquisition related items 

EBITDA 

Depreciation 

Amortisation 

Operating profit / (loss) 

(5,992)  

(3,648)  

4,481 

(2,544)  

(12,625)  

(143)  

(20,471)  

Finance cost 

Finance income 

Share of profit of equity-
accounted investees, net 
of tax 

Loss before tax 

External revenue by location of customers

Norway 

India 

United Kingdom 

Singapore 

Ecuador 

Rest of Europe 

Other 

(6,170)  

3,984 

273 

(22,384)  

2016
£000

18,697 

9,584 

13,610 

2,360 

4,876 

18,772 

41,476 

2017
£000

18,803 

15,040 

14,661 

9,821 

9,223 

30,471 

42,153 

No customers accounted for greater than 10% of total turnover in the year or the previous year.

140,172 

109,375 

136

137

STRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial Statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

8  Segment information (continued)

Non-current assets by location of assets

11  Taxation

Amounts recognised in profit or loss

Belgium 

United Kingdom 

Rest of Europe 

Rest of world 

9  Net finance costs

Interest received on bank deposits

Foreign exchange gains on financing activities

Dividend income

Finance income

Finance leases (interest portion)

Foreign exchange losses on financing activities

Interest expense on financial liabilities measured at amortised cost

Finance costs

Net finance costs recognised in profit or loss

2017
£000

244,627

44,911 

109,916 

19,022 

418,476 

2017
£000

258 

1,225 

12 

1,495 

(5)  

-

(1,955)  

(1,960)  

(465)  

2016
£000

276,327 

39,717 

80,336 

12,036 

408,416 

2016
£000

254 

3,730 

- 

3,984 

(16)  

(4,978)  

(1,176)  

(6,170)  

(2,186)  

The foreign exchange gains of £3,730,000 in 2016 arose on a foreign currency hedging instrument entered into to fix the 
exchange rate for the US Dollar consideration paid on the acquisition of INVE Aquaculture B.V.

10  Exceptional items

Items that are material because of their nature, non-recurring or whose significance is sufficient to warrant separate 
disclosure and identification within the consolidated financial statements are referred to as exceptional items. The 
separate reporting of exceptional items helps to provide an understanding of the Group’s underlying performance.

Acquisition related items

Exceptional expenses

Total exceptional costs

2017
£000

(6,254)  

605 

(5,649)  

2016
£000

12,945 

146 

13,091 

Acquisition related items are costs incurred in investigating and acquiring new businesses. During the year, the contingent 
consideration element of the provision for deferred consideration held for previous acquisitions has been recalculated 
considering up to date performance of those acquisitions and the projected performance for the final 3 months of the 
earn out period (which ended on 31 December 2017) against the relevant sales volumes and revenue targets. As a 
result, £7,283,000 (2016: £2,791,000) has been released in the year. Included in 2016 is £9,504,000 relating to the 
acquisition of INVE Aquaculture B.V.

Exceptional include: costs of £452,000 (2016: £nil) for legal fees incurred in relation to a dispute around building works 
with the main contractor at premises in Braintree within the Animal Health Division; costs totalling £182,000 (2016: £nil) 
relating to a  restructuring in an Animal Health Division business in Thailand, this included £97,000 of redundancy 
payments (staff costs) and £85,000 loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment; also included is a £29,000 
(2016: £nil) credit in relation to balances written off in preparation for liquidating an entity in the Advanced Animal Nutrition 
division. In 2016 restructuring costs (staff costs) of £146,000 were incurred on re-organisations within the Sustainability 
Science Division.

Current tax expense

Analysis of charge in period

Current tax:

Current income tax expense on profits for the period

Adjustment in respect of prior periods

Total current tax

Deferred tax expense

Origination and reversal of temporary differences

Deferred tax movements in respect of prior periods

Total deferred tax credit (Note 24)

Total tax credit

2017
£000

2016
£000

4,404 

245 

4,649 

(5,812)  

183 

(5,629)  

(980)  

1,252 

(1,250)  

2 

(4,048)  

8  

(4,040)  

(4,038)  

The reasons for the difference between the actual tax credit for the year and the standard rate of corporation tax in the 
United Kingdom applied to profits for the year are as follows:

Accounting loss before income tax

Expected tax credit based on the standard rate of UK corporation 
tax at the domestic rate of 19.5% (2016: 20%)

Income not taxable

Expenses not deductible for tax purposes

Research and development relief

Deferred tax not recognised

Adjustment to tax charge in respect of prior periods

Profits of associate reported net of tax

Effects of changes in tax rates

Different tax rates in overseas jurisdictions

Total tax credit

2017
£000

(8,100)  

(1,580)  

(1,484)  

801 

- 

2,835 

428 

- 

(142)  

(1,838)   

(980)  

2016
£000

(22,384)  

(4,477)  

- 

2,982 

(54)  

2,592 

(1,242)  

(54)  

(475)  

(3,310)   

(4,038)  

Changes in tax rates and factors affecting the future tax charge

Reductions in the UK corporation tax rate were substantively enacted in the year. The main rate of corporation tax was 
reduced from 20% to 19% effective from 1 April 2017 and to 17% from 1 April 2020. Deferred tax is calculated at the 
substantively enacted rates, at which the temporary differences and tax losses are expected to reverse, in the territories in 
which they arose.

The adjustment in respect of prior periods includes £109,356 (2016: £1,037,000) in relation to Research and 
Development tax credits from 2015 and 2016 received during the year. Income not taxable includes a release of provision 
for deferred consideration.

There was no deferred tax recognised in other comprehensive income.

138

139

STRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial Statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

12  Loss per share

13  Property, plant and equipment

Basic loss per share is calculated by dividing the profit or loss attributable to ordinary equity holders of the Company by the 
weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue during the period.

Loss attributable to equity holders of the parent (£000)

Weighted average number of shares in issue (thousands)

Basic loss per share (pence)

2017

(7,440)    

522,092 

(1.43)    

2016

(18,337)  

417,952 

(4.39)  

Diluted loss per share is calculated by adjusting the weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding to assume 
conversion of all dilutive potential ordinary shares. This is done by calculating the number of shares that could have been 
acquired at fair value (determined as the average market price of the Company’s shares since admission to AIM) based on 
the monetary value of the subscription rights attached to outstanding share options and warrants.

Therefore, the Company is required to adjust the loss per share calculation in relation to the share options that are in 
issue under the Company’s share based incentive schemes as follows:

Loss attributable to equity holders of the parent (£000)

Weighted average number of shares in issue (thousands)

Diluted loss per share (pence)

2017

(7,440)  

522,092 

(1.43)  

2016

(18,337)  

417,952 

(4.39)  

A total of 4,464,413 potential ordinary shares have not been included within the calculation of statutory diluted loss 
per share for the year (2016: 5,891,889) as they are anti-dilutive. However, these potential ordinary shares could dilute 
earnings/loss per share in the future.

Group

Cost

Balance at 1 October 2015

Additions

On acquisition

Reclassification

Fair value adjustment

Exchange differences

Disposals

Balance at 30 September 
2016

Balance at 1 October 2016

Additions

Reclassification

Exchange differences

Disposals

Balance at 30 September 
2017

Accumulated Depreciation

Balance at 1 October 2015

Depreciation charge for the 
year

Reclassification

Exchange differences

Disposals

Balance at 30 September 
2016

Freehold 
Land and 
Buildings
£000

Assets in the 
course of 
construction
£000

Long Term 
Leasehold 
Property 
Improvements
£000

Plant and 
Machinery
£000

E commerce 
Infra-structure
£000

Office 
Equipment 
and Fixtures
£000

5,630 

1,268 

3,017 

518 

- 

2,015 

- 

11,092 

11,785 

555 

2,721 

487 

- 

(1,718)  

1,480 

- 

93 

- 

(75)  

267 

(33)  

7,557 

4,803 

2,204 

34 

- 

1,325 

(411)  

204 

- 

- 

43 

- 

- 

- 

990 

317 

313 

(357)  

- 

100 

(227)  

Total
£000

28,194 

18,660 

6,089 

-

(75)  

3,800 

(671)  

12,448 

21,807 

4,847 

15,512 

247 

1,136 

55,997 

12,448 

5,147 

21,807 

21,708 

4,847 

893 

15,047 

(16,118)   

(1,188)  

310 

4 

(245)  

- 

(54)  

(217)  

15,512 

247 

7,993 

2,254

150 

(318)  

- 

- 

- 

- 

1,136 

309 

5 

19 

(242)  

55,997 

36,050 

- 

180 

(773)  

32,956

27,152

4,281 

25,591

247 

1,227 

91,454 

175 

638 

- 

143 

- 

956 

1,029 

245 

184 

- 

2,414 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

451 

1,780 

178 

469 

3,053 

358 

1,638 

79 

28 

- 

162 

321 

(300)  

21 

42 

1 

- 

204 

(283)  

36 

(167)  

2,859 

- 

529 

(467)  

916 

3,601 

242 

259 

5,974 

916 

3,601 

242 

259 

5,974 

759 

(305)  

(36)  

(123)  

2,817 

22 

108 

(160)  

2 

- 

-

- 

270 

38 

11 

(226)  

4,877 

-

267 

(509)  

1,211 

6,388 

244 

352 

10,609 

30,542

11,492 

5,455 

27,152

21,807 

11,092 

3,070 

3,931 

2,270 

19,203

11,911 

5,777 

3 

5 

26 

875 

877 

521 

80,845 

50,023 

25,141 

Balance at 1 October 2016

956 

Depreciation charge for the 
year

Reclassification

Exchange differences

Disposals

Balance at 30 September 
2017

Net book value

At 30 September 2017

At 30 September 2016

At 1 October 2015

140

141

STRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial Statements 
 
NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

13  Property, plant and equipment (continued)

Security over the assets is disclosed within note 20.

The above includes the following in respect of plant and machinery held under finance leases (note 28):

14  Intangible assets

Websites 
£000

Goodwill
£000

Patents and 
Trademarks
£000

Intellectual 
Property
£000

Customer 
Lists
£000

Contracts 
£000

Licences
£000

Genetics
£000

Development 
costs
£000

Total
£000

Cost

Accumulated depreciation

Net book value

Company 

Cost

Balance at 1 October 2015

Additions

Balance at 1 October 2016

Additions

Balance at 30 September 2017

Accumulated Depreciation

Balance at 1 October 2015

Depreciation charge for the year

Balance at 1 October 2016

Depreciation charge for the year

Balance at 30 September 2017

Net book value

At 30 September 2017

At 30 September 2016

At 1 October 2015

2017
£000

599 

(396)  

203 

2016
£000

824 

(266)  

558 

Office 
equipment and 
fixtures
£000

218 

148 

366 

137 

503 

64 

62 

126 

90 

216 

287 

240 

154 

Cost or valuation 
Balance at 1 October 
2015 
Additions — on acquisition 
Additions — externally 
acquired 
Additions — internally 
developed 
Disposals 
Exchange differences 
Balance at 30 September 
2016 

Balance at 1 October 
2016 
Additions — on acquisition 
Additions — externally 
acquired 
Additions — internally 
developed 
Exchange differences 
Balance at 30 September 
2017 

Accumulated amortisation 
and impairment 
Balance at 1 October 
2015 
Amortisation charge for 
the period 

Disposals 
Exchange differences 
Balance at 30 September 
2016 

Balance at 1 October 
2016
Amortisation charge for 
the period 
Exchange differences 
Balance at 30 September 
2017 

Net book value 
At 30 September 2017 
At 30 September 2016 
At 1 October 2015 

517 

29,702 
-  103,137 

709 
208 

4,737 
117,019 

1,327 
4,789 

8,524 
- 

5,824 
25,562 

20,256 
601 

71,596 
- 
-  251,316 

44 

- 

- 
- 
- 

- 
(345)  
20,690 

30 

- 
- 
128 

9 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

83 

- 
- 
16,625 

- 
- 
667 

- 
- 
1,124 

- 
- 
4,192 

- 
- 
5,332 

1,440 
- 
- 

1,440 
(345)  
48,758 

561  153,184 

1,075 

138,390 

6,783 

9,648 

35,578 

26,189 

1,440  372,848 

561  153,184 
12 

- 

1,075 
- 

138,390 
- 

6,783 
157 

9,648 
- 

35,578 
- 

26,189 
- 

1,440  372,848 
169 

- 

36 

- 

30 

26 

- 

18 

- 

- 
-

- 
(3,255)  

- 
(294)  

- 
(3,778)  

- 
(156)  

- 
(156)  

- 
(914)  

- 

- 
56 

- 

110 

2,144 
(53)  

2,144 
(8,550)  

597  149,941 

811 

134,638 

6,784 

9,510 

34,664 

26,245 

3,531  366,721 

515 

618 

449 

261 

133 

2,431 

937 

380 

3 

- 
- 

- 

(345)  
6 

84 

- 
74 

9,488 

349 

1,452 

1,797 

- 
541 

- 
9 

- 
240 

- 
124 

576 

- 
188 

518 

279 

607 

10,290 

491 

4,123 

2,858 

1,144 

518 

279 

607 

10,290 

491 

4,123 

2,858 

1,144 

13 
- 

- 
(3)  

79 
(55)  

13,544 
(932)  

552 
(15)  

1,443 
(60)  

2,162 
(121)  

680 
(13)  

531 

276 

631 

22,902 

1,028 

5,506 

4,899 

1,811 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 
- 

- 

5,724 

13,749 

(345)  
1,182 

20,310 

20,310 

18,473 
(1,199)  

37,584 

66  149,665 
43  152,905 
29,084 

2 

180
468 
260 

111,736 
128,100 
4,476 

5,756 
6,292 
1,194 

4,004 
5,525 
6,093 

29,765 
32,720 
4,887 

24,434 
25,045 
19,876 

3,531  329,137 
1,440  352,538 
65,872 

- 

142

143

STRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial Statements 
NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

15  Impairment testing of goodwill

16  Equity-accounted investees

Goodwill acquired in a business combination is allocated, at acquisition, to the cash generating units (CGUs) that are 
expected to benefit from the business combination. The Group tests goodwill annually for impairment, or more frequently if 
there are indications that goodwill might be impaired.

Goodwill arises across all of the Group’s operating segments, and is allocated specifically against the following CGUs:

FVG Limited

Benchmark Vaccines Limited

Atlantic Veterinary Services 
Limited

FAI do Brasil Criacao Animal 
Ltda

FAI Aquaculture Limited

5M Enterprises Limited

Salmobreed AS

Stofnfiskur HF

Akvaforsk Genetic Center*

Improve International Limited

Improve International GmbH

INVE Aquaculture Group

Animal 
Health
2017
£000

Sustainability 
Science
2017
£000

Breeding and 
Genetics
2017
£000

Technical 
Publishing
2017
£000

Advanced 
Animal 
Nutrition
2017
£000

288 

432 

167 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

96 

450 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

7,401 

14,049 

9,099 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

775 

- 

- 

- 

2,996 

12 

- 

887 

546 

30,549 

3,783 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

113,900 

113,900 

*Includes goodwill arising from the joint acquisition of Akvaforsk Genetics Center AS and Akvaforsk Genetics Center Inc.

FVG Limited

Benchmark Vaccines Limited

Atlantic Veterinary Services 
Limited

FAI do Brasil Criacao Animal 
Ltda

FAI Aquaculture Limited

5M Enterprises Limited

Salmobreed AS

Stofnfiskur HF

Akvaforsk Genetic Center*

Improve International Limited

INVE Aquaculture Group

Animal 
Health
2016
£000

Sustainability 
Science
2016
£000

Breeding and 
Genetics
2016
£000

Technical 
Publishing
2016
£000

Advanced 
Animal 
Nutrition
2016
£000

288

439

167

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

96

446

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

7,590

13,512

9,334

-

-

894

542

30,436

-

-

-

-

-

774

-

-

-

2,995

-

3,769

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

117,264

117,264

Total
2017
£000

288 

432 

167 

96 

450 

775 

7,401 

14,049 

9,099 

2,996 

12 

113,900 

149,665 

Total
2016
£000

288

439

167

96

446

774

7,590

13,512

9,334

2,995

117,264

152,905

*Includes goodwill arising from the joint acquisition of Akvaforsk Genetics Center AS and Akvaforsk Genetics Center Inc.

The recoverable amounts of the above CGUs have been determined from value in use calculations which have been 
predicated on discounted cash flow projections from formally approved budgets. These budgets cover a three-year period 
to 30 September 2020, and were then extrapolated into perpetuity taking account of specific growth rates for future cash 
flows, using individual business operating margins based on past experience and future expectations in light of anticipated 
economic and market conditions.
The pre-tax cashflows that these projections produced were discounted at pre-tax discount rates based on the Group’s beta 
adjusted cost of capital reflecting management’s assessment of specific risks related to each cash generating unit. Pre-tax 
discount rates of between 9 and 11% (2016: between 10% and 14%) have been used in the impairment calculations which 
the Directors believe fairly reflect the risks inherent in each of the CGUs, and a 2.5% growth rate (2016: 2.5%) was used in 
extrapolating the budgets into perpetuity.
The value in use assessment is sensitive to changes in the key assumptions used, most notably the discount rate, the 
growth rates and the timing of new product launches. Sensitivity analysis has been performed on the individual CGUs, and 
based on this analysis, no reasonably possible changes, such as a 1% change in discount rate, to these assumptions 
resulted in an additional impairment charge being required.

Interest in joint venture

Interest in associate

Joint venture

2017
£000

1,934

578

2,512 

2016
£000

-

581

581

During the year the Group invested in Salmar Genetics AS (SGA). SGA is a joint venture in which the Group has joint control 
and a 50% ownership interest. 

SGA is structured as a separate vehicle and the Group has a residual interest in the net assets of SGA. Accordingly, the 
Group has classified its interest in SGA as a joint venture.

The following table summarises the financial information of SGA as included in its own financial statements, adjusted 
for fair value adjustments and differences in accounting policies. The table also reconciles the summarised financial 
information to the carrying amount of the Group’s interest in SGA.

Percentage ownership interest

Non-current assets

Current assets

Non-current liabilities

Current liabilities

Net assets (100%)

Group's share of net assets (50%)

Elimination of unrealised profit

Carrying amount of interest in joint venture

Revenue

Cost of sales and operating costs

Finance costs

Profit and total comprehensive income (100%)

Group's share of total comprehensive income (50%)

2017
£000

50%

3,173 

2,917 

(441)  

(863)  

4,786 

2,393 

(459)  

1,934 

1,966 

(1,965)  

(1)  

- 

- 

2016
£000

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

The company is registered in Norway and the registered address is 7266 Kverva, Frøya, Norway.

Associate

The Group has a 22% interest in an associate Great Salt Lake Brine Shrimp Cooperative, Inc (the”Cooperative”). The 
Cooperative is one of the Group’s strategic suppliers and is an aquacultural cooperative organised for the purpose of 
harvesting, processing, manufacturing, and marketing artemia cysts and artemia feeds.

The Group’s interest in the Cooperative represents 22% of the Cooperative’s unallocated equity reserves.

The company is registered in USA and the registered address is 1750 West 2450 South, Ogden, Utah.

144

145

STRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial Statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

17  Subsidiary undertakings

17  Subsidiary undertakings (continued)

The direct and indirect subsidiary undertakings of Benchmark Holdings plc, all of which have been included in these 
consolidated financial statements, are as follows: 

Company name

Registered address

Animal Health Division

Country of 
Incorporation

Direct/
Indirect 
Group 
Interest

Share class

% of share 
capital/
voting 
rights held 
by Group 
companies

Note

Atlantic Veterinary Services 
Limited

Unit 7B Oranmore Business Park, 
Oranmore, Co Galway, H91 XP3F

Ireland

Indirect

1€ ordinary 
shares 

100%

Benchmark Animal Health 
Group Limited

Benchmark House, 8 Smithy Wood 
Drive, Sheffield S35 1QN

Benchmark Animal Health 
Limited

Benchmark House, 8 Smithy Wood 
Drive, Sheffield S35 1QN

Benchmark Vaccines Limited

Fish Vet Group Asia Limited

Benchmark House, 8 Smithy Wood 
Drive, Sheffield, S35 1QN

No.57/1 Moo 6, Samed Sub-
District, Muang Chonburi District, 
Chonburi Province, 20000

United Kingdom

Direct

£1 ordinary

100%

United Kingdom

Indirect

£1 ordinary

100%

United Kingdom

Indirect

£1 ordinary

100%

Thailand

Indirect

THB 10 
ordinary 

100%

Fish Vet Group Limited 
(dormant)

Benchmark House, 8 Smithy Wood 
Drive, Sheffield, S35 1QN

United Kingdom

Indirect

£1 ordinary

100%

Fish Vet Group Norge AS

Hoffsveien 21-23, 0275, Oslo.

Norway

Indirect

Fish Vet Group SPA

Bernardino 1978, Puerto Montt 

FVG Canada Inc

FVG Inc

FVG Limited

Knowledge Services – 
Sustainability Science 
Division

Allan Environmental Limited

Dust Collective Limited

FAI Aquaculture Limited 

FAI do Brasil Criação Animal 
LTDA

FAI Farms Limited

RL Consulting Limited 

Trie Benchmark Limited

1600-3500 Boulevard De 
Maisonneuve, Ouest, Westmount, 
QC, H3Z 3CI

Gulf of Maine Research Institute,  
350 Commercial Street, Portland, 
Maine -04101

22 Carsegate Road, Inverness, 
IV3 8EX

Benchmark House, 8 Smithy Wood 
Drive, Sheffield, S35 1QN

340 Glossop Road, Sheffield, 
S10 2HW

Benchmark House, 8 Smithy Wood 
Drive, Sheffield, S35 1QN

Fazenda Santa Terezinha, S/N — 
Zona Rural, Jaboticabal/SP , 
CEP: 14870-000 

Benchmark House, 8 Smithy Wood 
Drive, Sheffield, S35 1QN

Benchmark House, 8 Smithy Wood 
Drive, Sheffield, S35 1QN

The Field Station, Northfield 
Farmhouse, Wytham, Oxford, 
OX2 8QJ

Viking Fish Farms Limited 
(dormant)

Benchmark House, 8 Smithy Wood, 
Sheffield, S35 1QN

Woodland Limited (dormant)

Benchmark House, 8 Smithy Wood, 
Sheffield, S35 1QN

Chile

Indirect

Canada

Indirect

USA

Indirect

NOK 1 
ordinary

CLP 1 
ordinary

CAD 1 
ordinary

$10 
common 
stock

100%

100%

100%

100%

United Kingdom

Indirect

£1 ordinary

100%

United Kingdom

Indirect

£1 ordinary

100%

United Kingdom

Direct

£1 ordinary

100%

United Kingdom

Direct

£1 ordinary

100%

Brazil

Indirect

R$1 ordinary

99.25%

United Kingdom

Direct

£1 ordinary

100%

United Kingdom

Direct

£1 ordinary

100%

United Kingdom

Direct

£1 ordinary

100%

United Kingdom

Indirect

£1 ordinary

100%

United Kingdom

Direct

£1 ordinary

100%

Company name

Registered address

Country of 
Incorporation

Direct/
Indirect 
Group 
Interest

Share class

% of share 
capital/
voting 
rights held 
by Group 
companies

Note

Knowledge Services - 
Technical Publishing Division

5M Enterprises Inc

CBoT, 141 West Jackson Boulevard, 
Chicago, IL 60604-2900

USA

Direct

ordinary 
shares

98.50%

5M Enterprises Limited

Benchmark House, Smithy Wood, 
Sheffield, S35 1QN

AquacultureUK Limited 
(dormant)

Benchmark House, Smithy Wood, 
Sheffield, S35 1QN

Continuous Medical Training 
LDA

53 Rua do Bolhao, 4000-112 
Oporto

Curriculo Limited (dormant)

Benchmark House, Smithy Wood, 
Sheffield, S35 1QN

United Kingdom

Indirect

£1 ordinary

98.50%

United Kingdom

Direct

£5 ordinary

100%

Portugal

Indirect

£1 ordinary

100%

United Kingdom

Indirect

£1 ordinary

98.50%

European School of 
Veterinary Post-Graduate 
Studies Ltd (ESVPS)

Benchmark House, Smithy Wood, 
Sheffield, S35 1QN

United Kingdom

Indirect

Improve Formacion 
Veterinaria

Calle Rio Lozoya 5, Bloque Derecho 
3 A, 28981 Parla, Madrid

Improve France SARL

11 rue Laugier, 75017 Paris

Spain

France

Improve International 
Australia Pty

Improve International GmbH

Amtsgericht, Frankfurt, HRB 90624

Germany

PO Box 59, Kenmore QLD 4069

Australia

Indirect

Indirect

Indirect

Indirect

N/A

N/A

N/A

AUD 1 
ordinary 
shares

N/A

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

Improve International Limited

OOO 5M Enterprises

Benchmark Genetics Division

Alexandra House, Wroughton, 
Swindon SN4 0QJ

Shlizovaya embarkmet 8/1, 
Moscow, 115 115

United Kingdom

Direct

1p ordinary

100%

Russia

Indirect

Shares

0%

Akvaforsk Do Brasil Cultivo 
De Especies Aquaticas LTDA

Rua Doutor Ribamar Lobo, 451, 
Coco, Fortaleza, CEI

Brazil

Akvaforsk Genetic Center AS

Auragata 3, 6600 Sunndalsøra. 

Norway

Indirect

Indirect

ordinary

ordinary

Akvaforsk Genetic Center 
Spring Mexico, SA de CV 
(dormant)

Caguama 3023, Zapopan, Loma 
Bonita, Jaalisco 45086 

Akvaforsk Genetics Center 
Inc

25508 SW 169th Ave, Miami 
Florida 33031

Mexico

Indirect

ordinary

USA

Indirect

ordinary 

Benchmark Genetics Limited

Benchmark House, 8 Smithy Wood 
Drive, Sheffield S35 1QN

United Kingdom

Direct

£1 ordinary

Genetica Spring SAS

Calle 32, 8a-33 Office 215

Colombia

Indirect

ordinary

Genetilapia, SA de CV

Avenida Dr Carlos Canseco 5994 
Planta Alta El Cid C.P. 82110 
Mazatlan, Sinaloa

Salmobreed AS

Sandviksboder 3A,5035 Bergen

Mexico

Norway

Salmobreed Salten AS

Sørfjordmoen, Kobbelv, 8264 Engan Norway

Indirect

Indirect

Indirect

ordinary

ordinary

ordinary 

80%

100%

80%

80%

100%

100%

41%

100%

75%

Spring Genetics SRL

Calle Los Alemanes, Condominium 
Condado de Baviera, Apt 703

Costa Rica

Indirect

ordinary 

80%

b

a

a

a

146

147

STRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsNOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

17  Subsidiary undertakings (continued)

17  Subsidiary undertakings (continued)

Company name

Registered address

Stofnfiskur Chile Limitada 
(dormant)

Urmeneta 581, Of. 42, Puerto 
Montt, Reg. X

Stofnfiskur HF.

Stadarberg 2-4, Hafnarfjordur 

Stofngen EHF (dormant)

Stadarberg 2-4, Hafnarfjordur

Sudourlax EHF (dormant)

Stadarberg 2-4, Hafnarfjordur 

Country of 
Incorporation

Chile

Iceland

Iceland

Iceland

% of share 
capital/
voting 
rights held 
by Group 
companies

Share class

ordinary 

ordinary 

ordinary 

ordinary 

89.45%

89.45%

62.62%

89.45%

Direct/
Indirect 
Group 
Interest

Indirect

Indirect

Indirect

Indirect

Advanced Animal Nutrition 
Division

Fortune Ocean Americas, LLC

3528 W 500 South, Salt Lake City, 
Utah 84104

USA

Indirect

N/A 

100%

Fortune Ocean Technologies 
Ltd.

25/F., OTB Building 160 Gloucester 
Road, Wanchai

Hong Kong

Indirect

1 HKD 
ordinary 

100%

Golden West Artemia

Inland Sea Incorporated

INVE (Thailand) Ltd.

3528 W 500 South, Salt Lake City, 
Utah 84104

3528 W 500 South, Salt Lake City, 
Utah 84104

USA

USA

Indirect

$1 shares 

100%

Indirect

shares

100%

No. 79/ 1 Moo 1 Nakhonsawan-
Pitsanulok Road, Tumbol Nhong 
Lhum, Amphur, Wachirabharamee, 
Phichit Province

Thailand

Indirect

THB 1,000 
shares 

100%

Inve Animal Health, S.A.

Policarpo Sanz 12, 4º, 36202 Vigo, 
Pontevedra

Spain

Indirect

10€ shares

100%

Inve Aquaculture Europe 
Holding B.V.

Verlengde Poolseweg 16,4818 CL 
Breda

Inve Aquaculture Holding B.V.

Verlengde Poolseweg 16, 4818 CL 
Breda

Netherlands

Indirect

1€ shares

100%

Netherlands

Direct

$1 shares 

100%

Inve Aquaculture México, S.A. 
de C.V.

Avenida Camaron Sabalo # 51, 
Local 6, Interior, Plaza Riviera, Zona 
Dorada,Mazatlán Sinaloa 82110

Mexico

Inve Aquaculture NV

Hoogveld 93, 9200 Dendermonde

Belgium

Indirect

Indirect

MXN $1,000 
shares 

shares 

100%

100%

Inve Aquaculture Temp 
Holding B.V.

Verlengde Poolseweg 16, 4818 CL 
Breda

Netherlands

Indirect

1€ shares 

100%

INVE Aquaculture, Inc.

3528 W 500 South, Salt Lake City, 
Utah 84104

USA

Indirect

shares 

100%

Hong Kong

Indirect

$1 shares 

100%

Inve Asia Ltd

INVE Asia Services Ltd.

Inve do Brasil Ltda.

Inve Eurasia SA

Inve Hellas S.A.

25/F., OTB Building, 160 Gloucester 
Road, Wanchai

471 Bond Street, Tumbol Bang-
Pood, Amphur Pakkred, Nonthburi 
ProvinceTumbol bang-pood, Amphur 
Pakkred, Nontburi Province

Rua Augusto Calheiros, n° 226, 
Messejana, Fortaleza, Ceará, Zip 
Code 60.863-290

Thailand

Indirect

Brazil

Indirect

Karacaog˘lan Mahallesi 6170 Sokak 
No. 17/B Is¸ikkent/Izmir

Turkey

Indirect

93 Kiprou Str., 16451, Argyroupoli

Greece

Indirect

THB 100 
shares 

BRL 1 
shares 

6.25 TL 
shares 

$29.35 
shares 

100%

100%

100%

100%

Note

Company name

Registered address

Country of 
Incorporation

Direct/
Indirect 
Group 
Interest

Share class

Inve Latin America B.V.

Verlengde Poolseweg 16, 4818 CL 
Breda

Netherlands

Indirect

10€ shares 

Inve Technologies NV

Hoogveld 93, 9200 Dendermonde

Belgium

Indirect

INVE USA Holdings, Inc.

3528 W 500 South, Salt Lake City, 
Utah 84104

USA

Indirect

shares 

$0.001 
shares

% of share 
capital/
voting 
rights held 
by Group 
companies

100%

100%

100%

Note

Inve Vietnam Company Ltd

Invecuador S.A.

Inveservicios, S.A. de C.V.

Maricoltura di Rosignano 
Solvay S.r.l.

PT. Inve Indonesia

Salt Creek Holdings, Inc

Salt Creek, Inc.

8FI-19 Tan Canh, Ward 1, Tan Binh 
District, Ho Chi Minh City

CDLA. Las Conchas, MZ A-11 No. 
Lot 8 , Salinas, Santa Elena

Avenida Camaron Sabalo # 51, 
Local 6, Interior, Plaza Riviera, Zona 
Dorada,Mazatlán Sinaloa 82110

Rosignano Marittimo (LI), in via 
Pietro Gigli, 57013 , Solvay Loc. 
Lillatro

Cilandak Commercial Estate, Jl. 
Cilandak KKO — Cilandak Timur 
— PasarMinggu — South Jakarta 
12560

3528 W 500 South, Salt Lake City, 
Utah 84104

3528 W 500 South, Salt Lake City, 
Utah 84104

Sanders Brine Shrimp 
Company, L.C.

3528 W 500 South, Salt Lake City, 
Utah 84104

Tianjin INVE Aquaculture 
Co., Ltd

No. 108, 83 Area, Xiamen Road, 
Tanggu Economic Development 
Zone, Binhai, New Area, Tianjin

Tom Algae C.V.B.A.

USA

USA

USA

Vietnam

Indirect

N/A 

100%

Ecuador

Indirect

$1 shares 

100%

Mexico

Indirect

shares 

100%

Italy

Indirect

shares 

100%

Indonesia

Indirect

A shares & 
B shares 

$0.001 
shares 

$0.05 
shares

100%

100%

100%

Indirect

Indirect

Indirect

N/A 

100%

China

Indirect

shares 

100%

Graaf van Hoornestraat 1, 9850 
Nevele

Belgium

Direct

fixed and 
variable 
shares 

100%

United Aquaculture 
Technologies, LLC

3528 W 500 South , Salt Lake City, 
Utah 81404

USA

Indirect

N/A 

100%

Notes

a 

b 

 A put and call option agreement is in place to acquire the remaining 20% of Akvaforsk Genetic Center Inc, so the Group controls 100% of that 
company and its wholly owned subsidiaries despite having an 80% equity holding.

 European School of Veterinary Post-Graduate Studies is a company limited by guarantee and although the Group has no equity holding in the 
company, its results are consolidated into this annual report by virtue of control exercised under the provisions of IFRS 10 — Consolidated 
Financial Statements. The same is true of 0005M Enterprises, a limited company incorporated in Russia.

148

149

STRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial Statements 
 
 
NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

17  Subsidiary undertakings (continued)

19  Biological assets

Investments in 
subsidiary companies
£000

30,352 

231,267 

1,133 

262,752 

1,233 

706 

264,691 

Group

Organic sheep

Organic beef

Organic hens

Frozen Milt

Broodstock, eggs and fingerlings

Total biological assets

Less: non current broodstock

Total current biological assets

Livestock

2017
£000

214 

201 

24 

876 

15,228 

16,543 

(5,745)  

10,798 

2016
£000

262 

244 

23 

- 

11,330 

11,859 

(5,028)  

6,831 

The Group operates a commercial and research farming and technology transfer business, and at 30 September 2017 
held 2,909 (2016: 3,269) head of sheep, 327 (2016: 447) head of cattle, and 9,011 (2016: 6,940) hens. The Group had 
farming sales of £346,194 in the year ended 30 September 2017 (2016: £358,000).

The Group is exposed to financial risks arising from changes in the market value of farm animals. The Group does not 
anticipate that prices will decline significantly in the foreseeable future and, therefore, has not entered into derivative 
or other contracts to manage the risk of a decline in livestock price. The Group reviews its outlook for livestock prices 
regularly in considering the need for active financial risk management.

Frozen Milt

Where we have identified individual salmon carrying particular traits or disease resistance, semen (milt) can be extracted 
and deep frozen using cryopreservation techniques (the process of freezing biological material at extreme temperatures in 
liquid nitrogen). The calculation of the fair value of milt is based on production and freezing costs and, where appropriate, 
an uplift to recognise the additional selling price that can be achieved from eggs fertilised by premium quality milt. The 
estimated fair value of Frozen Milt at 30 September 2017 was £876,000 (2016: £nil). The increase in value of £876,000 
all relates to production.

Cost or valuation

Balance at 1 October 2015

Additions

Capitalisation of intercompany balances

Balance at 1 October 2016

Additions

Capitalisation of intercompany balances

Balance at 30 September 2017

Provisions

Balance at 1 October 2015, 30 September 2016 and 30 September 2017

(850)  

Net book value

At 30 September 2017

At 30 September 2016

At 1 October 2015

263,841 

261,902 

29,502 

During 2017, intercompany balances totalling £706,000 were converted into share capital (2016: £1,133,000). 
Additionally, £1,233,000 (2016: £600,000) of the charge associated with share options relates to employees of 
subsidiary companies, and so this amount has been treated as an investment by the Company.

In 2016, the Company acquired 100% of the share capital of INVE Aquaculture Holding B.V. for total consideration of 
£230,667,000.

18  Inventories

Group

Raw materials

Work in progress

Finished goods and goods for resale

Total inventories at the lower of cost and net realisable value

2017
£000

8,120 

1,781 

10,152 

20,053 

2016
£000

6,510 

10,039 

6,682 

23,231 

During 2017, £57,702,000 (2016: £44,320,000) was recognised as an expense for inventories carried at net realisable 
value. This is recognised in cost of sales. The cost of inventories recognised as an expense includes £1,414,000 
(2016: £686,000) in respect of write-downs of inventory to net realisable value.

The Company did not have any inventories at the year-end (2016: £nil).

150

151

STRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial Statements 
NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

5,745 

3,528 

9,273 

- 

3,913 

3,913 

- 

292 

292 

- 

- 

5,745 

1,661 

1,661 

89 

89 

9,483 

15,228 

Up to 3 months overdue

3 to 6 months overdue

6 to 12 months overdue

19  Biological assets (continued)

Broodstock, eggs and fingerlings

Salmon 
Broodstock
£000

Salmon 
eggs
£000

Salmon 
fingerlings
£000

Lumpfish 
eggs and 
fingerlings
£000

Tilapia
£000

Total
£000

7,584 

2,364 

295 

1,027 

60 

11,330 

Due to physical changes

(2,945)  

16,180 

Foreign exchange movements

247 

(39)  

4,441 

- 

300 

(136)  

- 

1,431 

435 

12 

47 

(3)  

3 

6,219 

13,531 

223 

Reduction due to sales / 
discarding of stock

- 

(14,626)  

(167)  

(1,013)  

(18)  

(15,824)  

Fair value adjustments

(54)  

34 

- 

(231)  

- 

(251)  

9,273 

3,913 

292 

1,661 

89 

15,228 

Biological assets 1 October 
2016

Increase due to production / 
purchase

Biological assets 
30 September 2017

Broodstock, eggs and 
fingerlings — non-current

Broodstock, eggs and 
fingerlings — current

Assumptions used for determining fair value of broodstock, eggs and fingerlings

IAS41 requires that biological assets are accounted for at the estimated fair value net of selling and harvesting costs. 
Fair value is measured in accordance with IFRS13 and is categorised into level 3 in the fair value hierarchy as the inputs 
include unobservable inputs in the valuation of broodstock, eggs and fingerlings for which there are no published market 
data available.

The calculation of the estimated fair value of salmon broodstock is primarily based upon its main harvest output being 
salmon eggs, which are priced upon our current seasonally adjusted selling prices for salmon eggs. These prices are 
reduced for harvesting costs, freight costs, incubation costs and market capacity to arrive at the net value of broodstock. 
The valuation also reflects the internally generated data to arrive at the biomass. This includes the weight of the 
broodstock, the yield that each kilogram of fish will produce and mortality rates. The fish take approximately four years to 
reach maturity, and the age and biomass of the fish is taken into account in the fair value.

The calculation of the fair value of the salmon eggs is based upon the current seasonally adjusted selling prices for 
salmon eggs less transport and incubation costs, and taking account of the market capacity. The valuation also takes 
account of the mortality rates of the eggs and expected life as sourced from internally generated data.

The calculation of the fair value of the salmon and lumpfish fingerlings is valued on current selling prices less transport 
costs. Internally generated data is used to incorporate mortality rates and the weight of the fish.

The lumpfish eggs are valued at cost. Internally generated data is used to calculate mortality rates.

The valuation models by their nature are based upon uncertain assumptions on sales prices, market capacity, weight, 
mortality rates, yields and assessment of the discounts to reflect the stages of maturity. The Group has a degree of 
expertise in these assumptions but these assumptions are subject to change. Relatively small changes in assumptions 
would have a significant impact on the valuation. A 1% increase/decrease in assumed selling price would increase/
decrease the fair value of biological assets by £160,000.

Total quantities held at 30 September were:

Salmon broodstock and fingerlings

Lumpfish fingerlings

Salmon eggs

The Company did not hold any biological assets at the year-end (2016: £nil).

2017

538 tonnes

2.1m units

37.2m units

2016

557 tonnes

1.5m units

23.6m units

20  Trade and other receivables

Group

Trade receivables

Less: provision for impairment of trade receivables

Trade receivables — net

Total financial assets other than cash and cash equivalents 
classified as loans and receivables

Prepayments

Other receivables

Total trade and other receivables

Less: non-current portion: prepayments

Current portion

2017
£000

33,284 

(3,210)  

30,074 

30,074

2,812 

5,644 

38,530 

- 

38,530 

2016
£000

32,133 

(2,130)  

30,003 

30,003

1,672 

2,613 

34,288 

- 

34,288 

The fair values of trade and other receivables classified as loans and receivables are not materially different to their 
carrying values. As at 30 September 2017 trade receivables of £4,577,000 (2016: £6,979,000) were past due but not 
impaired. They relate to customers with no default history. The ageing analysis of these receivables is as follows:

2017
£000

3,616 

716 

245 

4,577 

2017
£000

2,130 

- 

1,347

(267)   

3,210 

2016
£000

5,253 

1,139 

587 

6,979 

2016
£000

279 

1,831 

291 

(271)  

2,130 

Movements on the Group provision for impairment of trade receivables are as follows:

At 1 October

Assumed in a business combination

(Released)/provided during the year

Receivable written off during the year as uncollectable

At 30 September

The movement on the provision for impaired receivables has been included in the administrative expenses line in the 
consolidated income statement.

Other classes of financial assets included within trade and other receivables do not contain impaired assets.

152

153

STRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial Statements 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

20  Trade and other receivables (continued)

21  Trade and other payables (continued)

Company

Receivables from related parties

Loan provided to subsidiary company

Total financial assets other than cash and cash equivalents 
classified as loans and receivables

Prepayments

Other receivables

Total trade and other receivables

Less: non-current portion

Current portion

2017
£000

117,986 

8,362 

2016
£000

93,879 

7,243 

126,348 

101,122 

475 

20 

126,843

- 

126,843

218 

149 

101,489 

- 

101,489 

The balance of receivables from related parties includes a provision for impairment of £6,600,000 (2016: £nil) made 
during the year following a review of the individual subsidiaries’ net assets. 

21  Trade and other payables

Group

Trade payables

Other payables

Accruals

Financial liabilities, excluding loans and borrowings, classified as 
financial liabilities measured at amortised cost

Other payables — contingent consideration

Financial liabilities, excluding loans and borrowings, classified as 
financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss

Other payables — tax and social security payments

Deferred income

Total trade and other payables

Less: non-current portion of other payables — contingent 
consideration

Current portion

2017
£000

22,534 

5,629 

9,687 

37,850 

1,222 

1,222 

2,882 

3,757 

45,711 

(1,213)  

44,498 

2016
£000

14,172 

8,271 

5,239 

27,682 

8,806 

8,806 

593 

2,976 

40,057 

(8,825)  

31,232 

Book values approximate to fair value at 30 September 2017 and 2016.

The financial liability at fair value through profit and loss relates to contingent consideration outstanding from business 
combinations. The majority of this relates to deferred cash consideration dependent on the performance of the acquired 
businesses and the fair value is derived from the likely liabilities based on current performance against the targets at each 
reporting date. Included in contingent consideration is a put/call agreement exercisable and payable in 2022 to acquire 
the remaining 20% stake in Akvaforsk Genetics Center Inc for a sum determined by future performance. The minimum 
consideration is NOK 1 (one Krone) payable in the event the business under performs the minimum target set and the 
maximum consideration is capped at NOK 60m. If Akvaforsk Genetics Center Inc achieves the projections provided by 
the vendors, payment will be NOK 10m and this assumption has been used in calculating the fair value of the liability. As 
disclosed in note 10, there has been a release of £7,283,000 (2016: £2,791,000) of the amount provided.

Company

Trade payables

Payables to related parties

Accruals

Financial liabilities, excluding loans and borrowings, classified as 
financial liabilities measured at amortised cost

Other payables — contingent consideration

Financial liabilities, excluding loans and borrowings, classified as 
financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss

Other payables — tax and social security payments

Total trade and other payables

Less: non-current portion of other payables — contingent 
consideration

Current portion

Book values approximate to fair value at 30 September 2017 and 2016.

22  Loans and borrowings

Group

Non-Current

Bank borrowings

Other loans

Finance lease creditor (note 28)

Current

Other loans

Finance lease creditor (note 28)

Total loans and borrowings

2017
£000

474 

24,156 

1,142 

25,772 

84 

84 

339 

26,195 

- 

26,195 

2017
£000

36,391 

60 

2 

36,453 

6,019 

215 

6,234 

42,687 

2016
£000

1,336 

23,517 

1,063 

25,916 

82 

82 

104 

26,102 

- 

26,102 

2016
£000

37,133 

60 

214 

37,407 

- 

289 

289 

37,696 

The fair value of loans and borrowings is not materially different to the carrying value and has not been separately 
disclosed.

On 30 December 2015, the Group completed the acquisition of the Inve Aquaculture Group and on the same day entered 
into new borrowing facilities consisting of a five-year revolving credit facility (expiring on 11 December 2020) of up to 
$70,000,000 secured on the assets of the parent company, UK subsidiary companies and certain overseas subsidiary 
companies. At 30 September 2017, $50,000,000 was drawn down on the facility. The interest rate on the facility is 
between 1.9% and 3.0% above LIBOR depending on leverage.

The finance lease liabilities are secured on the assets to which they relate.

At 30 September 2017 SalmoBreed Salten AS had a NOK 60 million short term loan outstanding from its minority 
shareholder, Salten Stamfisk AS. The interest rate on the loan was 2.5% above seven day Norwegian Interbank Offered 
Rate (NIBOR). The loan was fully repaid in October 2017 from the proceeds of a new NOK 216 million construction loan 
facility provided by Nordea Bank Norge ASA to SalmoBreed Salten AS. The construction loan is available for drawdown up 
to 31 December 2018. The interest rate on this new facility is 2.5% above seven day NIBOR. Once the construction loan 
has been fully drawn, the loan converts into a five year term loan at an interest rate of 2.65% above 3 month NIBOR.

154

155

STRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial Statements 
 
 
 
 
NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

22  Loans and borrowings (continued)

The currency profile of the Group's loans and borrowings is as follows:

Sterling

US Dollar

Euro

Norwegian Krone

Thai Baht

Company

The book value and fair value of loans and borrowings are as follows:

Non-Current

Bank borrowings

Other loans

Total loans and borrowings

2017
£000

71 

36,391 

200 

6,019 

6 

42,687 

2017
£000

36,391 

60 

36,451 

2016
£000

97 

37,133 

456 

- 

10 

37,696 

2016
£000

37,133 

60 

37,193 

The fair value of loans and borrowings is not materially different to the carrying value and has not been separately 
disclosed.

The currency profile of the Company’s loans and borrowings is as follows:

Sterling

US Dollar

2017
£000

60 

36,391 

36,451 

2016
£000

60 

37,133 

37,193 

23  Provisions

Group

At 1 October 2015

Assumed in a business combination

Charged to profit or loss

Foreign exchange movement

Utilised in year

At 1 October 2016

Credited to profit or loss

Foreign exchange movement

Utilised in year

At 30 September 2017

Current

Non-current

At 30 September 2017

Current

Non-current

At 30 September 2016

Legal fees provision

Legal fees 
provision
£000

Repairs 
provision
£000

Other provisions
£000

201 

- 

349 

- 

(88)  

462 

- 

- 

(262)   

200 

200 

- 

200 

462 

- 

462 

30 

- 

40 

- 

- 

70 

- 

- 

- 

70 

70 

- 

70 

70 

- 

70 

802 

291 

107 

63 

(709)  

554 

(336)   

7 

(45)  

180 

180 

- 

180 

554 

- 

554 

Total
£000

1,033 

291 

496 

63 

(797)  

1,086 

(336)   

7 

(307)  

450 

450 

- 

450 

1,086 

- 

1,086 

The legal fees provision relates to potential costs the Group may be liable for relating to a legal action it took against a 
third party in relation to intellectual property matters. Management believe the provision held to be adequate and expect 
conclusion to the matter in the next 12 months.

Repairs provision

Under property operating lease agreements, FAI Farms Limited, a subsidiary company, has a rolling obligation to maintain 
all properties to the standard that prevailed at the inception of the lease. The Directors estimate the costs of this 
obligation at £15,000 (2016: £15,000). Additionally, Benchmark Vaccines Limited has a repairs provision of £55,000 
(2016: £15,000) in respect of its Braintree premises.

Other provisions

During the year provisions of a further £25,000 were made and amounts of £45,000 were utilised to total £180,000 
(2016: £200,000) in relation to potential rebates to customers/distributors based on targeted volumes, price fluctuations 
and potential stock returns under right of return clauses. The Directors expect these to be settled in the financial year 
ended 30 September 2018.

A provision of £354,000 held at the previous year end for an overseas customs duty dispute has been released to profit or 
loss as it was no longer required.

No provisions were held by the Company at the year-end (2016: £nil).

156

157

STRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial Statements 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

24  Deferred tax

24  Deferred tax (continued)

Deferred tax is calculated in full on temporary differences under the liability method using the substantively enacted rates 
in the relevant territories in which the temporary differences and tax losses are expected to reverse.

The movement on the deferred tax account is as shown below:

The movements in deferred tax assets and liabilities (prior to the offsetting of balances within the same jurisdiction as 
permitted by IAS 12) during the period, together with amounts recognised in the consolidated income statement and 
amounts recognised in other comprehensive income are as follows:

Group

At 1 October

Acquired during the year

Recognised in income statement

Tax credit (note 11)

Exchange differences

Recognised in equity

At 30 September

Company

At 1 October

Recognised in income statement

Tax credit (note 11)

Recognised in equity

At 30 September

2017
£000

(63,261)  

- 

5,629 

1,273 

- 

(56,359)  

2017
£000

- 

- 

- 

- 

2016
£000

(8,224)  

(50,106)  

4,040 

(8,676)  

(295)  

(63,261)  

2016
£000

170 

(127)  

(43)  

- 

There was no deferred tax recognised in other comprehensive income.

Deferred tax assets have been recognised in respect of all tax losses and other temporary differences giving rise to 
deferred tax assets where the Directors believe it is probable that these assets will be recovered. The Directors believe 
there is sufficient evidence that the amounts recognised will be recovered against future taxable profits in the relevant 
tax jurisdiction. The Group did not recognise deferred tax assets of £9,112,000 (2016: £5,535,000) in respect of losses 
amounting to £28,492,000 (2016: £21,903,000) and temporary differences of £1,363,000 (2016: £4,358,000), where 
there was insufficient evidence that the amounts will be recovered.

No deferred tax is recognised on the unremitted earnings of overseas subsidiaries and joint ventures. As the earnings are 
continually reinvested by the Group and there is no intention for these entities to pay dividends, no tax is expected to be 
payable on them in the foreseeable future.

Group 

Accelerated capital allowances

Other temporary and deductible 
differences

Available losses

Fair value of share options

Asset
2017
 £000 

- 

- 

2,922 

- 

Liability
2017
 £000 

Net
2017
 £000 

(Charged)/ 
credited to 
profit or loss
2017
 £000 

(Charged)/ 
credited to 
equity
2017
 £000 

(58,348)  

(58,348)  

3,126 

(1,081)  

- 

- 

(1,081)  

2,922 

- 

(281)  

2,635 

- 

5,480 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

Net tax assets / (liabilities)

2,922 

(59,429)  

(56,507)  

Group 

Accelerated capital allowances

Other temporary and deductible 
differences

Available losses

Fair value of share options

Net tax assets / (liabilities)

Company 

Accelerated capital allowances

Other temporary and deductible 
differences

Available losses

Fair value of share options

Net tax assets / (liabilities)

Company 

Accelerated capital allowances

Other temporary and deductible 
differences

Available losses

Fair value of share options

Net tax assets / (liabilities)

Liability
2016
 £000 

Net
2016
 £000 

(Charged)/ 
credited to 
profit or loss
2016
 £000 

(Charged)/ 
credited to 
equity
2016
 £000 

(62,748)  

(62,748)  

4,962 

(800)  

- 

(800)  

287 

- 

(1,149)  

225 

2 

(63,548)  

(63,261)  

4,040 

- 

- 

- 

295 

295 

Asset
2016
 £000 

- 

- 

287 

- 

287 

Asset
2017
 £000 

Liability
2017
 £000 

Net
2017
 £000 

(Charged)/ 
credited to 
profit or loss
2017
 £000 

(Charged)/ 
credited to 
equity
2017
 £000 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

Asset
2016
 £000 

Liability
2016
 £000 

Net
2016
 £000 

(Charged)/ 
credited to 
profit or loss
2016
 £000 

(Charged)/ 
credited to 
equity
2016
 £000 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

3 

(130)  

- 

- 

(127)  

- 

- 

- 

(43)  

(43)  

158

159

STRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial Statements 
 
NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

25  Share capital and additional paid-in capital

26  Reserves

Allotted, called up and fully paid

Ordinary shares of 0.1 penny each

Balance at 30 September 2015

Shares placed to fund the acquisition of INVE

Shares issued as consideration for the 
acquisition of INVE

Exercise of share options

Shares issued to management 

Placing shares to fund investments in joint 
ventures and capital projects

Share issue costs recognised through equity

Balance at 30 September 2016

Exercise of share options

Benchmark Share Incentive Plan

Balance at 30 September 2017

Number

Share Capital
£000

Additional 
paid-in capital
£000

219,349,525 

215,922,141 

38,635,671 

50,742 

110,873 

47,279,127 

 - 

521,348,079 

991,144 

25,811 

522,365,034 

219 

216 

39 

 - 

 - 

47 

 - 

521 

1 

- 

522 

94,672 

185,477 

33,188 

 - 

95 

30,684 

(4,685)  

339,431 

- 

- 

339,431 

On 30 December 2015, the Company issued 215,922,141 shares of 0.1p each at a price of 86p per share to fund the 
acquisition of INVE Aquaculture Holdings B.V. In addition, on 31 December 2015, the Company issued 38,635,671 shares 
of 0.1p each at 86p as part consideration for the acquisition. Non-recurring costs of £4.4 million were incurred in relation 
to the share placing and this has been charged to the share premium account.

On 2 March 2016, the Company issued a total of 50,742 shares of 0.1p each to 6 employees of the Group relating to 
share options granted in August 2013 and March 2015.

On 20 April 2016, the Company issued a total of 110,873 shares of 0.1p each at a price of 86p per share to certain 
managers of INVE Aquaculture Holdings B.V.

On 4 August 2016, the Company placed 47,279,127 shares of 0.1p each at a price of 65p per share to fund investment 
in certain strategic joint ventures and capital projects. Non-recurring costs of £0.2 million were incurred in relation to the 
share placing and this has been charged to the share premium account.

On 1 December 2016, the Company issued a total of 670,173 shares of 0.1p each to certain employees of the Group 
relating to share options granted in August 2013 and March 2015.

On 6 March 2017, the Company issued a total of 203,105 shares of 0.1p each to certain employees of the Group relating 
to share options granted in August 2013 and March 2015.

On 13 March 2017, the Company issued a total of 25,811 shares of 0.1p each in respect of the Benchmark Share 
Incentive Plan (“SIP”). The shares are free matching shares issued upon certain conditions being met following purchase 
by eligible employees of partnership shares in 2014.

On 3 April 2017, the Company issued a total of 117,866 shares of 0.1p each to certain employees of the Group relating 
to share options granted in August 2013 and March 2015.

Employee share option scheme

The Company introduced an employee share option scheme in 2010. The options existing immediately before admission 
to trading on AIM on 18 December 2013 were subdivided into equivalent options over the new 0.1p ordinary shares. At the 
year end, options exist over 4,543,420 (2016: 5,257,431) 0.1p ordinary shares in the Company and the exercise price is 
the nominal value of 0.1p per share. Movements in the share options are disclosed in note 30.

Members of the scheme can exercise the options at any point from the third anniversary of the option grant date until 
the options lapse on the tenth anniversary of the option grant date. Options cannot be exercised after the option holder 
ceases to hold employment with any member of the Group.

The following describes the nature and purpose of each reserve within equity:

Reserve

Description and purpose

Share premium reserve

Amount subscribed for share capital in excess of nominal value.

Merger reserve

Under merger relief, the amount in excess of nominal value attributed to shares issued 
as consideration in an acquisition where the Group has secured at least a 90% equity 
holding in the other company. 

Capital redemption reserve

Amounts transferred from share capital on redemption of issued shares.

Foreign exchange reserve

Gains/losses arising on retranslating the net assets of overseas operations into sterling.

Retained earnings

All other net gains and losses and transactions with owners (e.g. dividends) not 
recognised elsewhere. To simplify presentation, the share-based payment reserve has 
been combined with the retained earnings reserve. The share-based payment reserve 
recognised the value of equity-settled share-based payment transactions provided to 
employees, including management personnel, as part of their remuneration. Refer to 
note 31 for further details of these plans.

During the current year the directors noticed that the amount that was described as share premium reserve in the prior 
year financial statements should have been described as additional paid-in capital as it was made up of two components, 
the share premium reserve as well as a merger reserve. As a result the reserve has been re-labelled as paid-in capital 
instead of share premium reserve. This change is merely presentational. The balance of additional paid-in share capital 
includes the merger reserve balance of £33,188,000, the balance being the share premium reserve. The merger reserve 
arose due to the Company issuing 38,635,671 shares of 0.1p each at 86p as part consideration for the acquisition of 
INVE Aquaculture Holdings B.V. on 30 December 2015.

27  Non-controlling interest

The following table summarises the information relating to each of the Group’s subsidiaries that has a material non-
controlling interest (NCI), before any intra-group eliminations.

Year ended 30 September 2017

NCI percentage

Non-current assets

Current assets

Non-current liabilities

Current liabilities

Net assets

Other 
individually 
immaterial 
subsidiaries
£000

Total
£000

Stofnfiskur 
HF.
£000

Salmobreed 
Salten AS
£000

10%

16,184 

11,330 

(1,880)  

25%

24,517 

716 

- 

(11,698)  

(11,250)  

13,936 

13,983 

Net assets attributable to NCI

1,459 

3,500 

12

4,971 

Revenue

Profit/(loss)

OCI

Total comprehensive income

Profit/(loss) allocated to NCI

OCI allocated to NCI

Cash flows from operating activities

Cash flows used in investment activities 

Cash flows from financing activities (dividends to NCI: £nil)

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents

14,345 

4,116 

(1,280)  

2,836 

431 

(134)  

- 

(99)  

(256)  

(355)  

(25)  

(64)  

2,425 

3,781 

(1,815)  

(23,858)  

500 

1,110 

20,737 

660 

(86)  

37

320 

(161)  

160

161

STRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial Statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

27  Non-controlling interest (continued)

Year ended 30 September 2016

NCI percentage

Non-current assets

Current assets

Non-current liabilities

Current liabilities

Net assets

Net assets attributable to NCI

Revenue

Profit

OCI

Total comprehensive income

Profit allocated to NCI

OCI allocated to NCI

Cash flows from operating activities

Cash flows used in investment activities 

Cash flows (used in)/from financing activities (dividends 
to NCI: £nil)

Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents

Stofnfiskur 
HF.
£000

Salmobreed 
Salten AS
£000

Other 
individually 
immaterial 
subsidiaries
£000

Total
£000

10%

9,195 

12,663 

(7,244)   

(3,511)   

11,103 

1,163 

7,933 

415 

2,646 

3,061 

43 

277 

993 

(3,612)  

(1,496)  

(4,115)  

50%

996 

32 

- 

(913)  

115 

58 

- 

- 

24 

24 

- 

12 

935 

(996)  

93 

32 

60

1,281 

(34)  

(10)  

9 

279 

28  Leases

Finance leases

The Group leases plant and machinery with a carrying value of £203,000 (2016: £558,000). Such leases are generally 
classified as finance leases as the rental period amounts to the estimated useful economic life of the assets concerned 
and often the Group has the right to purchase the assets outright at the end of the minimum lease term by paying a 
nominal amount.

Future lease payments are due as follows:

Not later than one year

Later than one year and not later than five years

Later than five years

Not later than one year

Later than one year and not later than five years

Later than five years

Minimum lease 
payments
2017
£000

220 

2 

- 

222 

Minimum lease 
payments
2016
£000

294 

215 

- 

509 

The present values of future lease payments are analysed as:

Current liabilities

Non-current liabilities

Operating leases — lessee

Interest
2017
£000

Present value
2017
£000

5 

- 

- 

5 

215 

2 

- 

217 

Interest
2016
£000

Present value
2016
£000

5 

1 

- 

6 

2017
£000

215 

2 

217 

289 

214 

- 

503 

2016
£000

289 

214 

503 

The Group has entered into commercial leases on certain items of land and buildings. These leases have an average life 
of greater than five years. There are no restrictions placed on the Group by entering into these leases.

The total future value of minimum lease payments under non-cancellable operating leases for land and buildings are as 
follows:

Not later than one year

Later than one year and not later than five years

Later than five years

2017
£000

2,860 

5,667 

4,021 

12,548 

2016
£000

1,765 

4,122 

2,825 

8,712 

162

163

STRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial Statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

29  Retirement benefits

The Group operates a defined contribution pension scheme. The assets of the scheme are held separately from those of 
the Group in an independently administered fund. The pension cost represents contributions payable by the Group and 
amounted to £1,506,000 (2016: £1,079,000). Contributions totalling £783,000 (2016: £306,200) were payable to the 
fund at the balance sheet date and are included in other payables.

30  Capital commitments

At 30 September 2017, the Group and Company had capital commitments as follows:

Contracted for but not provided within 
these financial statements

9,339 

4,833 

- 

- 

Group
2017
£000

Group
2016
£000

Company
2017
£000

Company
2016
£000

31  Share-based payment

Share options

The Group operates equity settled share option schemes for certain employees. Options are exercisable at a price equal 
to the nominal value of the parent Company’s shares. The vesting period is three years. If the options remain unexercised 
after a period of ten years from the date of grant the options expire. Options are forfeited if the employee leaves the Group 
before the options vest.

The share options under the scheme are as follows:

Year ended 30 September 2017:

Year

As at 
1 October 
2016

Granted in 
2017

Exercised in 
2017

Forfeited in 
2017

As at 
30 September 
2017

Option 
Price*

No. of options

2013

89,000 

2013

1,113,000 

2015

864,903 

2015

119,396 

2016

3,071,132 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

2017

 - 

463,702 

(89,000)  

(891,000)  

- 

- 

- 

0.10p

222,000 

0.10p

(11,144)  

(78,723)  

775,036 

0.10p

- 

- 

- 

(21,821)  

97,575 

0.10p

(86,025)  

2,985,107 

0.10p

- 

463,702 

0.10p

* The option price is the nominal value of the parent Company’s shares. 

Exercise 
Period

August 
2016 to 
July 2023

August 
2016 to 
July 2023

March 
2018 to 
February 
2025

July 2018 
to June 
2025

March 
2019 to 
February 
2026

March 
2020 to 
February 
2027

31  Share-based payment (continued)

Year ended 30 September 2016:

Year

As at 
1 October 
2015

Granted in 
2016

Exercised in 
2016

Forfeited in 
2016

As at 
30 September 
2016

Option 
Price*

No. of options

2013

89,000 

 - 

 - 

 - 

89,000 

0.10p

2013

1,183,000 

 - 

(35,000)  

(35,000)  

1,113,000 

0.10p

2015

988,753 

 - 

(15,742)  

(108,108)  

864,903 

0.10p

2015

140,433 

 - 

 - 

(21,037)  

119,396 

0.10p

2016

 - 

3,093,493 

 - 

(22,361)  

3,071,132 

0.10p

* The option price is the nominal value of the parent Company’s shares 

Exercise 
Period

August 
2016 to 
July 2023

August 
2016 to 
July 2023

March 
2018 to 
February 
2025

July 2018 
to June 
2025

March 
2019 to 
February 
2026

Options exercised in 2016 resulted in 50,742 shares being issued at a weighted average price of 0.1p. The related 
weighted average share price at the time of exercise was 59.5p per share.

Share options issued in August 2013

Share options outstanding at the year-end had a weighted average exercise price of 0.1p and a weighted average 
remaining contractual life of 6 years.

The fair value of the equity settled share options granted is estimated at the date of grant using the Black Scholes Merton 
model taking into account the terms and conditions on which the options were granted. The expense recognised for these 
options during the year was £nil (2016: £7,000). This has been reflected in the income statement and included within 
operating costs.

Additional share options issued in August 2013

Share options outstanding at the year-end had a weighted average exercise price of 0.1p and a weighted average remaining 
contractual life of 6 years. The fair value of the equity settled share options granted is estimated at the date of grant using 
the Black Scholes Merton model taking into account the terms and conditions on which the options were granted.

The expense recognised for these options during the year was £nil (2016: £93,000). This has been reflected in the 
income statement and included within operating costs.

Of the options issued in August 2013, 35,000 were exercised early in respect of good leavers.

Share options issued in March 2015 and July 2015

Share options outstanding at the year-end had a weighted average exercise price of 0.1p and a weighted average remaining 
contractual life of 7 years. The fair value of the equity settled share options granted is estimated at the date of grant using 
the Black Scholes Merton model taking into account the terms and conditions on which the options were granted.

The expense recognised for these options during the year was £329,000 (2016: £344,000). This has been reflected in 
the income statement and included within operating costs.

Of the options issued in March 2016, 15,742 were exercised early in respect of a good leavers.

Of the total number of options outstanding at 30 September 2017, 222,000 (2016: 1,202,000) were exercisable.

Share options issued in March 2016

Options exercised in 2017 resulted in 991,144 shares being issued at a weighted average price of 0.1p. The related 
weighted average share price at the time of exercise was 83.6p per share.

Share options outstanding at the year-end had a weighted average exercise price of 0.1p and a weighted average remaining 
contractual life of 8 years. The fair value of the equity settled share options granted is estimated at the date of grant using 
the Black Scholes Merton model taking into account the terms and conditions on which the options were granted.

164

165

STRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial Statements 
 
 
 
 
NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

31  Share-based payment (continued)

32  Business Combinations

The expense recognised for these options during the year was £663,000 (2016: £305,000). This has been reflected in 
the income statement and included within operating costs.

Share options issued in March 2017

Share options outstanding at the year-end had a weighted average exercise price of 0.1p and a weighted average 
remaining contractual life of 9 years. The fair value of the equity settled share options granted is estimated at the date 
of grant using the Black Scholes Merton model taking into account the terms and conditions on which the options were 
granted.

The expense recognised for these options during the year was £110,000 (2016: £nil). This has been reflected in the 
income statement and included within operating costs.

Share options to be issued in 2018

During the year, the decision was made to replace an element of cash bonuses for the year with an award of share options 
to be granted after the year end. The final details of the award have not yet been determined, but a charge of £500,000 
has been made in the income statement for the year as an estimate of element of the value of the award relating to the 
current year.

Share warrants

In January 2015, the Company issued warrants to acquire 259,312 ordinary shares at 112p per share as part 
consideration for the acquisition of the Improve International Limited business and its subsidiaries. The exercise of 
these warrants is subject to the extension of certain contracts and the warrants are exercisable at any point between the 
extension of these contracts and six months thereafter.

The Group did not enter into any other share-based payment transactions with parties other than employees during the 
current or previous period.

The total charge reflected in the consolidated income statement in relation to all of the above share based transactions, 
and included within operating costs was £1,602,000 (2016: £749,000). The share-based payment expense comprises:

Equity-settled schemes

Total share based payment charge

2017
£000

1,602

1,602

2016
£000

749

749

The total charge reflected in the Company’s income statement was £369,000 (2016: £149,000), all charged to operating 
costs in both years.

No business combinations occurred during the year. In the previous year the following business combinations occurred:

On 30 December 2015, Benchmark Holdings plc completed the acquisition of 100% of INVE Aquaculture Holding B.V. 
(“INVE”), a leading specialist manufacturer of primary stage technically advanced nutrition and health products for 
aquaculture, for a total consideration of $342 million (approximately £230.7 million).

The Directors identified a strong strategic rationale for the acquisition. INVE’s leadership in speciality aquaculture 
nutrition market is complementary to Benchmark’s position in genetics and health. The acquired business complements 
Benchmark’s existing expertise and operations within aquaculture and the enlarged group will become a leading global 
provider of technology for sustainable food production, with a strong focus on the aquaculture sector, benefiting from 
immediate scale in advanced aquaculture nutrition and health products, enhanced sales, marketing and distribution 
network and the opportunity for cross selling and new product development. The acquisition created the Advanced Animal 
Nutrition Division.

In view of the size of the acquisition relative to the Group, the transaction was classified as a reverse takeover under 
the AIM rules. For accounting purposes, Benchmark Holdings plc was identified as the acquirer and the transaction was 
accounted for using the acquisition method. This was because Benchmark Holdings plc had obtained control over the 
operations of INVE as a result of the transaction.

Certain intangible assets were separately identified and were provisionally valued as shown in the table below. Related 
deferred tax was also provided. The goodwill arising on the acquisition represents the synergies available from combining 
the two businesses, and the skills and technical talent of the INVE workforce.

On 11 August 2016, the Group acquired control over aquaculture breeding programmes previously owned and operated 
by Centro de Investigación de la Acuicultura de Colombia Ceniacua through its wholly-owned subsidiary, Genética Spring 
S.A.S. (“Genética Spring”) together with the related business, freehold land, buildings and assets, for a total consideration 
of $2.17m (£1.67m). The acquisition added a third species, shrimp, to Benchmark’s aquaculture breeding business in 
salmon and tilapia, and strengthened Benchmark’s position in the fast-growing shrimp industry. 

166

167

STRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial Statements 
NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

32  Business Combinations (continued)

Details of the fair value of the consideration paid and assets and liabilities assumed during the previous year are shown in 
the table below:

32  Business Combinations (continued)

Measurement of fair values

Consideration

Cost of investment

Satisfied by:

Cash

Deferred consideration

Equity

Total consideration

Fair value of assets acquired

Customer list

Patents and trademarks

Intellectual property

Contracts and Licences

Genetic Materials and Breeding Nuclei

Deferred tax on intangibles

Fixed assets

Investments

Inventories

Trade and other receivables

Cash and cash equivalents

Trade and other payables

Tax and social security

Loans and borrowings

Provisions

Total identifiable net assets

Goodwill

INVE Aquaculture 
Holdings B.V.
£000 

Genética Spring 
£000

Total
£000

230,667 

1,673 

232,340 

197,440 

- 

33,227 

230,667 

4,789 

208 

117,019 

25,562 

- 

(50,106)  

5,017 

350 

16,686 

14,914 

6,647 

(10,104)  

(2,373)  

(570)  

(291)  

127,748 

102,919 

709 

964 

- 

1,673 

- 

- 

- 

- 

601 

- 

1,072 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

1,673 

- 

198,149 

964 

33,227 

232,340 

4,789 

208 

117,019 

25,562 

601 

(50,106)  

6,089 

350 

16,686 

14,914 

6,647 

(10,104)  

(2,373)  

(570)  

(291)  

129,421 

102,919 

The valuation techniques used for measuring the fair value of material assets acquired were as follows.

Assets acquired

Valuation technique

Property, plant and 
equipment

Intangible assets

Inventories

Market comparison technique and cost technique: The valuation model considers quoted 
market prices for similar items when they are available, and depreciated replacement 
cost when appropriate. Depreciated replacement cost reflects adjustments for physical 
deterioration as well as functional and economic obsolescence.

Relief-from-royalty method and multi-period excess earnings method: The relief-from-royalty 
method considers the discounted estimated royalty payments that are expected to be 
avoided as a result of the patents or trademarks being owned. The multi-period excess 
earnings method considers the present value of net cash flows expected to be generated 
by the customer relationships, by excluding any cash flows related to contributory assets. 

Market comparison technique: The fair value is determined based on the estimated selling 
price in the ordinary course of business less the estimated costs of completion and sale, 
and a reasonable profit margin based on the effort required to complete and sell the 
inventories. 

Other assets and 
liabilities

Management consider the fair value of other assets and liabilities to be equivalent to the 
purchase price, which was supported by an independent valuation. 

The fair value of the ordinary shares issued was based on the listed share price of the Company at 30 December 2015 of 
£0.86 per share.

The Group incurred acquisition related costs of £9,504,000 in respect of INVE Aquaculture B.V. and £135,000 in respect 
of Genética Spring.

During 2016 INVE contributed £54,870,000 to the Group’s revenue and increased EBITDA by £15,729,000 for the period. 
The Genética Spring contributed £nil to the Group’s revenue and decreased EBITDA by £61,000 for the period. The table 
below shows the Group’s pro-forma revenue and EBITDA for 2016 if the acquisitions had taken place at the start of that 
period.

Revenue

EBITDA

INVE 
Aquaculture 
Holdings B.V.
£000 

14,200 

2,300 

2016
£000 

109,375 

(3,863)  

Genética Spring 
£000 

- 

- 

Total
£000 

123,575 

(1,563)  

168

169

STRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial Statements  
 
NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

NOTES  FORMING  PART  OF  THE  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  (continued)
for the year ended 30 September 2017

33  Related party transactions

34  Contingent liabilities

Transactions between the Company and its subsidiary undertakings (see note 17), which are related parties, amounted 
to £3,737,400 in the year (2016: £1,912,8000). These transactions related to intercompany recharges. Balances with 
subsidiary undertakings are shown in notes 20 and 21. Details of transactions between the Group and other related 
parties are disclosed below.

Included within trade and other payables due after more than one year are the following loans from related parties:

There is a full cross guarantee in respect of certain borrowings of other Group undertakings. Total such borrowings of other 
Group undertakings at 30 September 2017 were £nil (2016: £3,559,000).

35  Notes supporting statement of cash flows

Cash and cash equivalents for purposes of the statement of cash flows comprises:

Group

Cash at bank and in hand

Cash and cash equivalents

Company

Cash at bank and in hand

Cash and cash equivalents

2017
£000

18,779 

18,779 

1,776 

1,776 

2016
£000

38,140 

38,140 

27,480 

27,480 

Director

Total

Group
2017
£000

(60)  

(60)  

Group
2016
£000

(60)  

(60)  

Company
2017
£000

(60)  

(60)  

Company
2016
£000

60 

60 

The loan from Malcolm Pye, Chief Executive Officer, has no fixed repayment date.

Group entities entered into the following trading transactions and outstanding balances with related parties that are not 
members of the Group:

Sales of good and services

Salmar Genetics AS

Great Salt Lake Brine Shrimp 
Cooperative, Inc 

Purchases

Benchmark Holdings Limited Executive 
Pension scheme

Great Salt Lake Brine Shrimp 
Cooperative, Inc 

Transaction values  
for the year ended 30 September

Balance outstanding  
as at 30 September

2017
£000

974 

195 

2016
£000

- 

294 

2017
£000

- 

103 

2016
£000

- 

72 

72 

72 

- 

20 

15,819 

11,440 

3,344 

4,400 

The Company is controlled by the shareholders. There is no single controlling party.

170

171

STRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial StatementsBenchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Financial Statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
04

ADDITIONAL 
INFORMATION

174  Glossary 

175  Advisers

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITI ONAL   
INFO RMATION

We believe our new land-based salmon 
production facility is the world’s most 
advanced. It is the result of decades of 
combined know-how and experience.  
We are already seeing excellent growth 
rates and virtually no mortality. The future 
is pathogen-free egg production and this 
site enables us to meet this demand.

Stig Joar Krogli  
SalmoBreed Salten Project Manager

173

GLOSSARY

ADVISERS

3Es

Environment, Ethics & Economics — 
Benchmark’s framework for sustainability

Adjusted  
EBITDA 

EBITDA before exceptional  
and acquisition costs

AGM

AHPND

AIM

API

CAGR

CEO

CFO

CGU

CleanTreat®

CPD

Defra

EBITDA

Ectosan®

Annual General Meeting

Acute Hepatopancreatic Necrosis  
Disease — a shrimp disease — previously 
known as Early Mortality Syndrome

Alternative Investment Market

Active Pharmaceutical Ingredient

Compound Annual Growth Rate

Chief Executive Officer

Chief Financial Officer

Cash Generating Unit

Benchmark’s purification system which 
removes any detectable traces of medicine 
from treatment water before it is discharged 
into the ocean 

Continuing Professional Development

Department for Environment,  
Food and Rural Affairs

Earnings before interest, tax,  
depreciation and amortisation

Benchmark’s next generation  
sea lice treatment

EMI scheme

Enterprise Management Incentive scheme

EMS

Early Mortality Syndrome in shrimp,  
now known as AHPND

EU GMP

EU Good Manufacturing Practice

FAO

FAWC

FCR

FY

Genomic 
Selection

GWE

Food and Agriculture Organisation

Farm Animal Welfare Committee

Feed Conversion Ratio

Financial Year

Targeted breeding by selecting  
individuals based on their genome

Gutted Weight Equivalent

Histopathology

Diagnosis and study of disease

IFRS

Investing 
Activities

IP

IPO

LTIP

M&A

Organic  
growth

International Financial Reporting Standards

Investing Activities are those activities 
which have no associated income stream 
in the current period, but which are 
intended to provide the Group with income 
generating operations in future periods. 
Includes exceptional items, research and 
development expenditure, pre-operational 
expenses for new ventures and costs of 
acquiring new businesses

Intellectual Property

Initial Public Offering

Long-term Incentive Plan

Mergers & Acquisitions

Organic growth, as it applies to financial 
information, is the growth arising year on 
year in any part of the business eliminating 
the impact of the different ownership 
periods of any acquisitions made in either 
the current or prior year as appropriate

PD

Pancreas Disease

QCA Code

Quoted Companies Alliance  
Code — outlining best practice  
for quoted companies

qPCR

QTL

 Quantitative polymerase chain reaction  
— a diagnostic tool

Quantitative Trait Loci —  
DNA containing/linked to genes  
that underlie a quantitative trait

R&D

Research & Development

SalmoBreed 
Salten

Benchmark’s new land-based salmon egg 
and broodstock production facility currently 
under construction

Salmosan®

Benchmark’s sea lice bath treatment

SIP

SPR

Trading  
Activities

Share Incentive Plan

Specific Pathogen Resistant

Trading Activities are those operations 
which generate earnings in the current 
period excluding Investing Activities

Nominated Adviser and 
Broker: Numis Securities

Lawyers:  
Travers Smith LLP

10 Paternoster Square  
London  
EC4M 7LT

10 Snow Hill 
London 
EC1A 2AL

Auditor: KPMG LLP

Bankers: Lloyds Bank

1st Floor 
Butt Dyke House 
33 Park Row 
Nottingham 
NG1 6GY

Financial Advisers:  
Equity Strategies

3rd Floor  
New Liverpool House 
15 Eldon Street 
London 
EC2M 7LD

1 Sovereign Square 
Sovereign Street 
Leeds 
LS1 4DW

Registrars: Equiniti Limited

Aspect House 
Spencer Road 
Lancing 
West Sussex 
BN99 6DA

Financial Public Relations: 
MHP Communications 

6 Agar Street  
London  
WC2N 4HN

Information regarding forward-looking statements

This document includes statements that are, 
or may be deemed to be, ‘forward-looking 
statements’. These forward-looking statements 
can be identified by the use of forward-looking 
terminology, including the terms ‘believes’, 
‘estimates’, ‘plans’, ‘projects’, ‘anticipates’, 
‘expects’, ‘intends’, ‘may’, ‘will’, or ‘should’ or, 
in each case, their negative or other variations 
or comparable terminology, or by discussions of 
strategy, plans, objectives, goals, future events 
or intentions. These forward-looking statements 
include all matters that are not historical facts. 
They appear in a number of places throughout this 
document and include, but are not limited 

to, statements regarding the Company’s intentions, 
beliefs or current expectations concerning, among 
other things, its business, results of operations, 
financial position, prospects, growth, product 
pipeline, strategies and the industry in which 
it operates. By their nature, forward-looking 
statements involve risk and uncertainty because 
they relate to future events and circumstances 
and are not guarantees of future performance. 
The actual results may differ materially from those 
described in, or suggested by, the forward-looking 
statements contained in this document. Any 
forward-looking statements in this document 

reflect only the Directors’ and the Company’s 
current intentions or beliefs. Subject to the 
requirements of the AIM Rules, the Disclosure 
and Transparency Rules and any other applicable 
law or regulation, Benchmark explicitly disclaims 
any obligation or undertaking publicly to release 
the result of any revisions to any forward-looking 
statements in this document that may occur due 
to any change in Benchmark’s expectations or to 
reflect events or circumstances after the date of 
this document.

All images copyright © 2017 Benchmark Holdings plc and its subsidiaries 
Printed on FSC Certified paper — Manufactured with Windpower

175

Benchmark Holdings plc | Annual Report 2017 | Additional InformationSTRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATION 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
TECHNOLOGY 
DRIVEN GROWTH

Benchmark Holdings plc

Benchmark House 
8 Smithy Wood Drive 
Sheffield 
S35 1QN

t. +44 (0)114 240 9939 
w. benchmarkplc.com 
e. info@benchmarkplc.com